Difference between revisions of "Custom Firmware Package Notes"

From hummy.tv Wiki
Jump to: navigation, search
(Transportx)
 
(583 intermediate revisions by 7 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
 
'''BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
 
'''BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require an additional package to be installed, These Features are covered in the Web If section of this page
+
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require any additional packages to be installed. These features are covered in the Web If section of this page.
  
Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect}}
+
Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect.}}
  
 +
Also, see Forum Links [[Forum_Links|'''HERE''']]
  
 
==7Zip==
 
==7Zip==
  
Command line utility that can pack and un-pack zip type files
+
Command line utility that can pack and unpack zip type files
  
*Supported Packing / unpacking Formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
+
*Supported Packing / unpacking formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
 
*Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.
 
*Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.
 
   
 
   
 +
 +
==Android-Remote==
 +
[[File:h-rem1.png|100px|thumb|right]]
 +
[[File:h-rem2.png|100px|thumb|right]]
 +
 +
This is a remote-control app for the Humax HDR Fox-T2 digital video
 +
recorder and also the Foxsat, requirements are :-
 +
 +
*[https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Custom_Firmware_Overview '''Custom FirmWare'''] installed
 +
*The [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/WebIf_Remote_Controller '''IR Package'''] Installed
 +
*The [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Android App '''] installed on your phone / tablet
 +
*Connection to the same home network as the phone / tablet.
 +
 +
Version 2 of this App. adds provision for multiple Humaxs, the option for 1 or 2 screens depending on screen size and the Foxsat
 +
 +
The Android App. is available [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Click Here''']
 +
 +
==Arbookmarks==
 +
 +
Adds bookmarks into automatically or manually padded recordings, bookmarks are placed at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording | '''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points to all files in folders marked as Auto Decrypt, the following conditions must be met before the Bookmarks will be added :-
 +
* The Arbookmarks package must be installed
 +
* Files must be in a folder that is marked for auto-decryption ([[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Folders|'''open lock icon''']] present)
 +
* Files must be DLNA indexed (automatically done by the Humax periodically, [[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Files|'''lime green circular icon''']] present)
 +
* Files must not be recorded using AR i.e. the AR flags are not at start and end of file
 +
* AR flags must be present i.e. recordings made in the middle of a programme won't contain AR flags
 +
 +
==At==
 +
 +
at, batch, atq, atrm - queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution. This is the UNIX at command and atd daemon, which allow for scheduling of one-off commands to be run when specified.
 +
 +
More notes [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/At_%28Unix%29 '''HERE''']
 +
 +
 +
==Auto Schedule Restore==
 +
 +
This package checks whether the schedule is present on each boot, If a schedule is in place it is backed up to flash, otherwise the schedule and any favourites list are restored from the flash backup. The schedule will be deemed to be present if there is at least one schedule item or one reservation item existing
 +
 +
'''NOTES:-'''
 +
* After a re-boot the restore process will start and "Schedule Restored . . . Rebooting" will be displayed on the front display
 +
* A second re-boot will take place automatically after 15 seconds to finalise the restoration process
 +
* The Web-if will display "The recording schedule has been automatically restored" after the second re-boot
 +
  
 
==Auto-Unprotect==
 
==Auto-Unprotect==
  
The Auto Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any high definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect [[Diagnostic_Utilities | '''HERE''']] to fix any 'missed files'
+
The Auto-Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings on the HDR-Fox T2. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way as a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any High Definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter, new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect [[Diagnostic_Utilities | '''HERE''']] to fix any 'missed files'.
 +
 
 +
Auto, Auto-Unprotect makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP, Note, Foxy does not remove DTCP which is required for DLNA decryption
 +
 
 +
NOTES:-
 +
*Auto-Unprotect does not decrypt the file, however it does make decryption possible by the same means as for a Standard Definition file - see flow chart [[Encryption |'''HERE''']].
 +
*Auto-Unprotect on the HD-Fox T2 will not allow decryption unless the HD-Fox T2 is running in BootHDR mode
  
Auto Unprotect also makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP
+
==Auto-Update==
  
NOTE:- The removal of the ENC flag does not decrypt the file, However it does make decyption possible by the same means as a Standard Definition file, see flow chart [[Encryption |'''HERE''']]
+
This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them. It will check once per day at the earliest power on - for most people probably the 04:30 boot.
  
  
==Auto-Update==
+
==Badnts==
  
This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them, It will check once per day at the earliest power on, for most people probably the 04:30 boot
+
Utility to fix a recording error where a full size TS file is recorded but the associated NTS file generated by the Humax is of zero length, this results in the the Humax rejecting the file on playback. After the recording is decrypted in a folder that is marked for auto-decyption, the utility will look for a zero length NTS file and if found the NTS, THM and HMT files will all  be deleted (or moved to the [Deleted] folder), this will make the TS file playable on the Humax,however as the 'sidecar' files have been removed there will be some play-back
 +
limitations, e.g. transport controls etc.
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
*This utility only works on HDR-Fox T2 not HD-Fox T2
 +
*Only files stored in an auto-decrypt folder will be fixed
  
  
 
==Bash==
 
==Bash==
  
Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh | '''Sh (Shell)''']]  Command line / scripting language  [http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/manual/bashref.html '''See Reference Guide''']
+
Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh | '''Sh (Shell)''']]  Command line / scripting language. [http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/manual/bashref.html '''See Reference Guide''']
  
  
Line 36: Line 89:
 
===For HDR-Fox T2===
 
===For HDR-Fox T2===
  
The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server, This default server will still be in available after the Custom Firmware is installed, However only files under ‘Media’ are visible, Betaftpd has two possible Logins, If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessable. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used
+
The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server. The default server will still be available after the Custom Firmware is installed, however only files under ‘Media’ are visible. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.
  
 
NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
 
NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
Line 42: Line 95:
 
===For HD-Fox T2===
 
===For HD-Fox T2===
  
Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation, Betaftpd has two possible Logins, If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessable. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used
+
Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Blocklist==
 +
 
 +
See Transmission (torrent) Block List notes [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Blocklist_2|'''HERE''']].
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Bookmark==
 +
 
 +
The Humax Bookmarks used to place 'jump-to' points within a recording are also used by several Custom Firmware packages, as Follows:-
 +
*[[Edit_On_Box|'''Edit On Box''']] . . . A single or multiple bookmarks are used as cut and join points for editing a recording in the Web-If [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] option
 +
*[[#Set_Thumbnail|''' Set Thumbnails''']] . . . Uses the the first bookmark in a recording as a central point from which to pick a new thumbnail
 +
*[[#Arbookmarks|'''Arbookmarks''']] . . . Bookmarks are automatically added to a recording at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points so that a [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] can be performed
  
  
 
==BootHDR==
 
==BootHDR==
  
This Function for the HD-FOX T2 only, Allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume, BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-
+
<span style="background:#FFAAAA"><big>'''This package is for the HD-FOX T2 only (NOT for HDR-Fox T2</big>''') </span>
 +
 
 +
It allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume. BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-
  
 
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg install wget </span>
 
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg install wget </span>
Line 53: Line 121:
 
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall </span>
 
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall </span>
  
 +
Once the package is installed you can run in HDR-Fox T2 mode, while in this mode, the front panel display will freeze and the box will be incapable of making new recordings. To initiate HDR-Fox T2 mode copy the *Modsettings/TriggerHDR folder to the root of drive1 and then re-boot the HD-Fox T2
  
==Bsed==
+
Installing the BootHDR package also adds the command line keyword bootHDRmode, this can be used to invoke HDR mode
  
Binary-safe search/replace utility.
+
There is a Guide to using BootHDR on the Wiki [[Decrypt_recordings_on_the_HD-FOX_T2 | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Boot_Settings==
 +
 
 +
Set system parameters to specified values on every boot. [Update settings]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Bsed==
 +
 
 +
Binary-safe search/replace utility.
  
  
 
==BusyBox==
 
==BusyBox==
 
 
Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system, Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh_.28SHell.29 | '''Sh (Shell)''']] commands that can be used in a Telnet sessions, The List below shows the available commands, There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extention to get some help e.g. ls -?, A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE''']
+
Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system. Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh_.28SHell.29 | '''Sh (Shell)''']] commands that can be used in Telnet sessions. The list below shows the available commands. There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extension to get some help e.g. ls -?
 +
 
 +
A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE'''].
  
NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing
+
NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing.
  
 
<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
 
<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
Line 226: Line 307:
  
  
==CIFS==
+
==cfupdater==
  
The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote filesystems must currently be performed from the command line, Example :-
+
A flash update script for updating the custom firmware on an HDR without using USB sticks, It should be run in maintenance mode and does not currently support updating the loader.
  
 +
Once the package has been installed, copy the hdf file onto the hard disk (or make it available in maintenance mode), then reboot into maintenance mode and send a command line in the form :-
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mkdir /media/NAS </span>
+
<pre>
 +
/mod/sbin/cfupdater <hdf-file>
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
If you need remote progress, then you can telnet back into the box after the connection has closed then
 +
<pre> tail -f /tmp/cfupdate.log
 +
</pre>
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" </span>
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def </span>
+
==Channeldel==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mount -t cifs "//server/share /media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def </span>
+
Note: now superseded by tunefix
  
 +
Automatic channel deletion. select TV channels to be permanently removed from the group TV list in Web-If >> Settings >> Automatic Channel Deletion, selected channels, plus a set of 9 unavailable channels known to cause problems will be automatically deleted the next time the Humax is booted, and following any retune
  
==Cron==
+
Select all but one file and press delete to reduce the current list in /mod/boot/chandel.conf, the remaining file can be deleted later
  
Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you, It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so cron does not need to be installed, the tasks are held in a cron table or crontab, here is an example crontab :-
 
  
<pre>
+
==ChaseDecrypt==
humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
 
humax# cat root
 
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
 
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
 
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
 
humax#
 
  
</pre>
+
Retrieve and decrypt recording whilst recording is still in progress, uses Chaseget
  
Each line of crontab has the following structure:
+
See [[ChaseDecrypt]] for further details
  
<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every
+
==Chaseget==
  
The three examples above will run
+
Retrieve and decrypt recording, can run whilst recording is still in progress
#at 2AM every day
 
#at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
 
#every 10 Minutes continuously
 
  
It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-
+
This is intended to be used as part of other packages (such as detectads) rather than installed and used standalone
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> crontab -l </span>
+
Runs as first stage of pipeline, output is always to stdout
  
To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line
+
Usage= /mod/bin/chaseget recording.ts start_offset logfile > output.ts
  
==Curl Command==
+
==CIFS==
  
curl command line utility
+
The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote file systems must currently be performed from the command line. Example :-
  
  
==Custom TV Portal==
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mkdir /media/NAS </span>
  
An extension to the Humax TV Portal thats add some more apps
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" </span>
  
Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def </span>
  
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mount -t cifs //server/share "/media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def </span>
  
==Dedup (Command Line)==
+
==CLI==
  
The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser
+
This is an acronym for Command Line Interface, a CLI can be established by Telnetting into the Humax and being presented with a CLI prompt, If the Tmenu is displayed there will be a 'cli' option to gain the CLI prompt e.g. humax#
  
Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']]  that effectivly replaces the command line package, However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> dedup </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to
+
==Content Sharing==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> dedup -yes</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span> perform the changes as detailed below :-
+
Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Content Sharing = On
  
*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
+
Content Sharing is an in-built DLNA / UPnP server that allows the HDR to stream content over it's LAN connector to a DNLA / UPnP client, this feature is also used by the Custom Firmware to provide decryption of both Standard Definition and High Definition content
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
 
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/
 
  
  
==Disable DSO==
+
==Crashdiag==
  
Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events
+
Captures a memory dump (core file) when the main Humax process crashes,The dump files will end up in /mod/core/ called humaxtv.<UNIX timestamp> and a reboot is required following package installation in order to activate it
  
  
==Disable OTA==
+
==Crash Log==
  
This feature inhibits any Over The Air Software updates that may be transmitted by Humax
+
The Mulitenv 1.4 package contains a procedure that monitors the behaviour of running processes, If the Humax crashes a file will be generated under /mod/tmp/ called crash.log, it can be examined from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files. The Crash log will tell you if Custom Firmware plug-ins are being disabled as a result of the crash, To re-start undelete, redring and ir packages, run Web-If >> Diagnostics >> fix-flash-packages >> Run Diagnostic. To prevent the crash log auto disabling plug-ins, create a file with the following command :-
 +
<pre>
 +
touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/no_plugin_autodisable
 +
</pre>
  
  
==Dropbear SSH==
+
==Cron==
  
A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using telnet
+
Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you. It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so Cron does not need to be installed. The tasks are held in a Cron table or crontab. Here is an example crontab :-
to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work. Also allows the use of ''scp'' (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.
 
  
Login with username=root, password=humax
+
<pre>
 +
humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
 +
humax# cat root
 +
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
 +
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
 +
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
 +
humax#
 +
 
 +
</pre>
  
 +
Each line of crontab has the following structure:
  
==Dvbsnoop==
+
<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every
 +
 
 +
The three examples above will run
 +
#at 2AM every day
 +
#at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
 +
#every 10 Minutes continuously
  
Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info. [http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE''']
+
It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-
  
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> crontab -l </span>
  
==E2fs_Progs==
+
To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line
  
Ext2/3/4 Filesystem Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journaling, first allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure [[FAQs#How_do_I_convert_a_drive_to_EXT2.3F|'''HERE''']]
 
  
 +
==Cryptokey==
  
==EPG==
+
This is the unique key that is used by the Humax HDR / HD to encrypt and decrypt all recordings on the hard disk, it is made up from the MAC address of the unit (6 pairs of hexadecimal) followed by the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal)
  
The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-
+
The cryptokey can be examined, changed and reset (Cleared) to the original by sending the following [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nugget | '''nugget''']] command line options :-  
  
 
<pre>
 
<pre>
humax# epg
+
humax# nugget cryptokey
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.
+
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
 +
Using key:  <no custom key in use>
 +
 
 +
humax# nugget cryptokey 01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01
 +
Using key:  01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
  
Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...
+
humax# nugget cryptokey
 +
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
 +
Using key:  01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
  
  Options:
+
humax# nugget cryptokey -clear
    -b                    Brief output.
+
Cleared custom encryption key.
    -d[level]              Set debug level.
 
    -f<file>              Specify alternate EPG data file.
 
    -h                    Show help text.
 
    -p                    Parsable output.
 
 
 
  Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
 
    -C<CRID>              Show only events with this CRID.
 
    -D<descriptor type>    Show only selected descriptor type.
 
    -E<event id>          Show only selected event.
 
    -R<SCRID>              Show only events with this Series ID.
 
    -S<service id>        Show only selected service.
 
    -T<content type>      Show only selected content types.
 
    -@<unix timestamp>    Show only programmes at time.
 
    -/<unix timestamp>    Show only programmes on day.
 
    -/<days>              Show only programmes on day.
 
    -=<start>:<end>        Show only programmes in time period.
 
  
  Commands:
+
humax# nugget cryptokey
    dump                  Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
+
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
    dumpraw                Show raw data from the EPG.
+
Using key:  <no custom key in use>
    sqldump                Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
 
    sqlitedump <file>      Create SQLite database from EPG data.
 
    now                    Show what is currently on.
 
    first                  Show the time of the earliest record.
 
    last                  Show the time of the latest record.
 
    parse                  Parse the EPG, no output.
 
    search <text>          Search programme names for text.
 
    searchall <text>       Search programme names/descriptions for text.
 
 
</pre>
 
</pre>
  
 +
The cryptokey is used by the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts | '''Stripts Package''']] when decrypting files on the Humax
  
==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==
+
==Curl Command==
  
This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords
+
curl command line utility.
  
NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionallity has now been moved to [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''Remote Scheduling Auto''']]
 
  
 +
==Custom TV Portal==
  
Initial Setup :-
+
An extension to the Humax TV Portal that adds more features.
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
 
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
 
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL
 
  
 +
Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]
  
==Enable Telnet==
+
==DB Update==
  
Enable Telnet will install a telnet package onto a HDR unit. This package is only available for USB installation (It is not available via the Web-If)
+
General boot-time database update utility
  
  
==Ffmpeg==
+
==Dedup (Command Line)==
 +
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|right|150px]]
 +
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|right|150px]]
 +
The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser.
  
FFmpeg will record, convert and stream audio and video, It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library, It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link [http://ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html '''HERE''']
+
Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']] that effectively replaces the command line package. However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-
  
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> dedup </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to
  
==Fix-disk==
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> dedup -yes</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span> perform the changes as detailed below :-
  
''fix-disk'' is a disk partition repair utilty (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full filesystem check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem.
+
*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
 +
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
 +
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/
  
The utility is invoked via [[Telnet]].
 
  
{{Note|If you try running ''fix-disk'' via telnet and get an error which looks like
+
==Dedup (Series Helper File)==
  ''/bin/sh: y: not found''
 
then your telnet client is not set up properly - see the [[Telnet|Telnet Notes]] for more information.}}
 
  
=== Invocation ===
+
It is possible to create a series helper file that Dedup can use to enhance the re-naming of series, the file should be placed in the directory containing the series and named series.info, Dedup will look for this file and automatically use it, an example of a series.info file is shown below :-
  
humax# <span style="background:#FFFF00"> fix-disk </span>
+
<pre>
 +
Pilot ==> S1-01
 +
Pilot The Big Bang Theory ==> S1-01
 +
The Big Bran Hypothesis ==> S1-02
 +
The Fuzzy Boots Corollary ==> S1-03
 +
The Luminous Fish Effect ==> S1-04
 +
The Hamburger Postulate ==> S1-05
 +
The Middle Earth Paradigm ==> S1-06
 +
The Dumpling Paradox ==> S1-07
 +
The Grasshopper Experiment ==> S1-08
 +
The Cooper-Hofstadter Polarization ==> S1-09
 +
</pre>
  
Warning: This procedure will freeze the Humax for anything up to 2 hours.
+
The above 'full' file is stored here :- [http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info '''http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info''']
Please ensure that no recordings are currently in progress or scheduled during this time.
 
Do you wish to continue [Y/N]?
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> y </span>
 
  
After reboot please wait until the front panel display shows:"
+
==DeRMA==
MAINTENANCE'''
 
and then telnet in and type this command:
 
fix-disk
 
Rebooting.....
 
  
humax# <span style="background:#FFFF00"> fix-disk </span>
+
After a Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Set-Return-to-manufacturer (RMA) Mode operation has been carried out, standard Humax software should be re-installed, this should leave the Humax in an 'out-of-the-box' state, however if for any reason the 'RMA' message is still being displayed, then loading this package onto a USB stick and inserting it into the Humax, while it is running, will remove the RMA message
  
Checking partition /dev/sda3...
 
Checking partition /dev/sda1...
 
Creating swap file...
 
Checking partition /dev/sda2...
 
Are you having problems with a delete loop [Y/N]?
 
  
Note:- If the Humax is constantly displaying the word 'Deleting', answer Yes, if not answer No
+
==Detectads==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> y </span> or <span style="background:#FFFF00"> n </span>
+
This package will attempt to add bookmarks to a recording to indicate the start and end of advert breaks, so that the adverts can be removed with a crop function, cropping can optionally be performed automatically within the package,
  
Finished - type 'reboot' to return to normal operation
+
Using the new 'Detect while recording' function the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even, with some limitations, start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.
  
humax# <span style="background:#FFFF00"> reboot </span>
+
See [[DetectAds]] for more information about this package
  
==Fix-disk (USB)==
+
==Disable DSO==
  
As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [[http://www66.zippyshare.com/v/44898524/file.html '''HERE''']]
+
Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events. When the Humax carries out a retune all recording Schedule events and all Favourites Lists will be erased, however recorded programmes will not be erased. DSO events are sent to the Humax by the TV broadcasters when they need to change some aspect of the Electronic Programme Guide, such as changing a channel number or adding extra channels
  
 +
==Disable OTA==
  
==Flatten==
+
Disable OTA inhibits any Over The Air software updates transmitted by Humax by deleting OTA schedules created by the Humax, it also has a "Create Reminder to cover OTA Period = Y / N" option in the Settings page, this will create a reminder on the Red Button (channel 200) to cover the OTA period, if you want it to use a different channel or on / off time, you can edit the reminder using the standard Humax on-TV menus, you can also disable the reminder option completely, however if this is done there is a small possibility that an OTA search may still be actioned on your Humax
  
This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu, Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder, Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders, After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten
+
'''Note''' The OTA service for software updates is no longer in operation
  
'''NOTE''' :- All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
+
==Display==
  
'''Exceptions'''
+
A command that can be used to display a message on the HDR-Fox T2 front panel, any alpha-numerics (Max 12 characters) can be displayed, scrolling is not available. The new message will be displayed until the unit is rebooted or changed by the Humax, example :-
  
* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> /sbin/display 'Twelve Chars' </span>
* Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
 
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)
 
  
==Flexget==
+
The display can be blanked with :-
  
FlexGet is a multipurpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, podcasts, comics, series, movies, etc.It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files,search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> /sbin/display ' ' </span>
 +
 
 +
The display of the HD-Fox T2 (Max 4 characters + colon) can also be used by adding '$' to the string e.g. :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> /sbin/display '$he:lp' </span>
 +
 
 +
'''NOTE''' If the Humax updates the display e.g. after a channel change or is scrolling the display then your message will be removed
 +
 
 +
==DLNA-Filter==
 +
 
 +
Filters out DLNA server network traffic to prevent other DLNA servers from crashing the Humax. File /mod/etc/init.d/S02dlna-filter contains rule="-p tcp --dport 50001 -j DROP". From default the package works on all IP addresses, however in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for DLNA-Filter package, it is possible to restrict operation to one or more specified IP addresses
 +
 
 +
'''NOTES'''
 +
*DLNA-Filter  requires Custom Firmware Version 3.00 or later
 +
*DLNA-Filter will block access to the Humax DLNA server if the Settings for DLNA-Filter package is left blank
  
A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> */1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron </span>
+
==DLNA-Servername==
  
* Flexget Documentation [http://flexget.com '''HERE''']
+
This package enables Humaxs on the same network to be given a unique Media Server Name. It requires that Custom Version 2.20 or above be installed
  
  
==Forcedate==
+
==Dropbear SSH==
  
This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is require if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Ntp_Client | '''NTP Client''']]
+
A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using Telnet
 +
to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work.  Also allows the use of ''scp'' (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.
  
 +
Login with username=root, password=humax
  
==Foscam==
+
Create file /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys containing a list of public keys
  
See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''HERE''']]
+
Note :- chmod 700 /mod/.ssh and chmod 600 /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys
  
  
==FTP==
+
==Dropbear SFTP==
  
File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax, The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required, Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, Although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package, If access to the whole file structure is required programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.
+
Greenend-sftp is a plugin for dropbear-ssh which provides SFTP server functionality.SFTP is often used to provide remote virtual filesystem (VFS) access to the Humax's filesystem, e.g. via FUSE. For further info. click link [http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/sftpserver/ '''HERE''']
  
Notes :-
 
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
 
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
 
*10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
 
*login = humaxftp
 
*password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used
 
  
 +
==DUMA==
  
==Grep==
+
D.U.M.A. - Detect Unintended Memory Access - A Red-Zone memory allocator. It can detect memory leaks and buffer overruns (or underruns) in a malloc() / new memory buffer. DUMA is a fork of Bruce Perens' Electric Fence library.
  
Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text, The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file.  [http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?egrep Syntax Here]
 
  
Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep
+
==Dustbin==
  
<pre>
+
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Undelete | '''Undelete''']]
humax# cat original-file.txt
 
  
-H      Add 'filename:' prefix
 
-h      Do not add 'filename:' prefix
 
-n      Add 'line_no:' prefix
 
-l      Show only names of files that match
 
-L      Show only names of files that don't match
 
-c      Show only count of matching lines
 
-o      Show only the matching part of line
 
-q      Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
 
-v      Select non-matching lines
 
-s      Suppress open and read errors
 
-r      Recurse
 
-i      Ignore case
 
-w      Match whole words only
 
-F      PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
 
-E      PATTERN is an extended regexp
 
-m N    Match up to N times per file
 
-A N    Print N lines of trailing context
 
-B N    Print N lines of leading context
 
-C N    Same as '-A N -B N'
 
-e PTRN Pattern to match
 
-f FILE Read pattern from file
 
  
humax# grep match original-file.txt
+
==Dvbsnoop==
-l      Show only names of files that match
 
-L      Show only names of files that don't match
 
-c      Show only count of matching lines
 
-o      Show only the matching part of line
 
-v      Select non-matching lines
 
-e PTRN Pattern to match
 
humax#
 
</pre>
 
  
 +
Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info [http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE'''].
  
==Gnu Fdisk==
+
Note that one cannot inspect live streams off air on the Humax, as the Humax doesn't provide the required software interface to its DVB hardware.
  
GNU fdisk
 
  
 +
==E2fs_Progs==
  
==HMT==
+
Ext2/3/4 File system Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journalling. First allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure [[FAQs#How_do_I_convert_a_drive_to_EXT2.3F|'''HERE''']].
  
This package displays information on the humax *.hmt file, A small 'sidecar' file created alogside the main *.ts video file
 
  
From a Telnet Session, Navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, Then enter hmt {filename}
+
==[Eject]==
 +
[[File:Eject.png|left|50px]]
 +
The Eject icon is displayed (If a USB Device is detected), on all Web-if Headers adjacent to the FREEVIEW icon, when the user clicks on this icon, a list of USB devices attached to the Humax will be displayed with the following information (from Left to Right) :-
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt </span>
 
  
<pre>
 
humax# hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt
 
Format:HD
 
Title:KAISER CHIEFS DD5.1
 
Channel:4096 (BBC HD)
 
Folder:/mnt/hd2/My Video/MY-ARCHIVE/
 
Filename:KAISER CHIEFS DD5_1_20110410_0147
 
Genre:Entertainment
 
EPG:Performance from the Kaiser Chiefs from the Later... with Jools Holland archives.
 
They play I Predict a Riot, the party and festival anthem of 2005.
 
  
Flags: HD,Unlimited Copies,
+
*USB interface name
Copy count:0
+
*USB Device name
 +
*Format type, e.g. FAT32, NTFS, EXT3 etc.
 +
*Device % used
 +
*Device capacity
 +
*Eject Option
  
Scheduled start:1302396300 (Sun Apr 10 00:45:00 2011)
+
To the far right there is an eject icon, when the user clicks on this icon, an option will be displayed, e.g. "Eject USB-1? - OK or Cancel, If OK is selected the USB device will be unmounted, this is similar to the Windows option "Safely Remove Hardware"
Scheduled duration:300
 
Recording start:1302396449 (Sun Apr 10 00:47:29 2011)
 
Recording end:1302396706 (Sun Apr 10 00:51:46 2011)
 
Play resumes at: 15 seconds in.
 
  
Service ID (SID):17472
+
If 'Device not mounted' is displayed, the user can click on the recycle icon (far right) to display a 'Rescan OK/Cancel' option, this will allow a rescan and the USB device will be re-mounted
Transport Stream ID (TSID):16516
 
Originating Network ID (ONID):9018
 
Programme Map Table PID (PMTPID):100
 
Video PID:101
 
Audio PID:102
 
Bookmarks:0 =
 
</pre>
 
  
 +
'''NOTES'''
 +
*This feature is only present on the HDR-FOX T2, not the HD-FOX T2
  
==Humidify==
+
==EPG==
  
A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files
+
The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-
  
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# epg
 +
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.
  
==Id3v2==
+
Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...
  
A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also [[#Popol |'''Popol''']]
+
  Options:
 +
    -b                    Brief output.
 +
    -d[level]             Set debug level.
 +
    -f<file>              Specify alternate EPG data file.
 +
    -h                    Show help text.
 +
    -p                    Parsable output.
  
Available commands
+
  Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
 +
    -C<CRID>              Show only events with this CRID.
 +
    -D<descriptor type>    Show only selected descriptor type.
 +
    -E<event id>          Show only selected event.
 +
    -R<SCRID>              Show only events with this Series ID.
 +
    -S<service id>        Show only selected service.
 +
    -T<content type>      Show only selected content types.
 +
    -@<unix timestamp>    Show only programmes at time.
 +
    -/<unix timestamp>    Show only programmes on day.
 +
    -/<days>              Show only programmes on day.
 +
    -=<start>:<end>        Show only programmes in time period.
 +
 
 +
  Commands:
 +
    dump                  Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
 +
    dumpraw                Show raw data from the EPG.
 +
    sqldump                Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
 +
    sqlitedump <file>      Create SQLite database from EPG data.
 +
    now                    Show what is currently on.
 +
    first                  Show the time of the earliest record.
 +
    last                  Show the time of the latest record.
 +
    parse                  Parse the EPG, no output.
 +
    search <text>          Search programme names for text.
 +
    searchall <text>      Search programme names/descriptions for text.
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
When using the ''epg'' command on HD-FOX, note that:
 +
# There is no EPG cache file to inspect unless there is a recording drive fitted;
 +
# To access the cache, use ''epg -f /media/drive1/epgsavedata''.
  
<pre>
 
  -h,  --help              Display this help and exit
 
  -f,  --list-frames        Display all possible frames for id3v2
 
  -L,  --list-genres        Lists all id3v1 genres
 
  -v,  --version            Display version information and exit
 
  -l,  --list              Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
 
  -R,  --list-rfc822        Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
 
  -d,  --delete-v2          Deletes id3v2 tags
 
  -s,  --delete-v1          Deletes id3v1 tags
 
  -D,  --delete-all        Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
 
  -C,  --convert            Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
 
  -1,  --id3v1-only        Writes only id3v1 tag
 
  -2,  --id3v2-only        Writes only id3v2 tag
 
  -a,  --artist  "ARTIST"  Set the artist information
 
  -A,  --album  "ALBUM"    Set the album title information
 
  -t,  --song    "SONG"    Set the song title information
 
  -c,  --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
 
                            Set the comment information (both
 
                            description and language optional)
 
  -g,  --genre  num        Set the genre number
 
  -y,  --year    num        Set the year
 
  -T,  --track  num/num    Set the track number/(optional) total tracks
 
  
You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
+
==Epgfix==
For example:
 
        id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
 
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".
 
</pre>
 
  
 +
epgfix causes a channel change once a day (by default at 4am) for 3 minutes before restoring the original channel it was tuned to. This is enough to trigger the Humax software to keep the EPG up to date when the Humax is on 24/7, (it has no advantage when the unit has a daily on/standby cycle).
  
==Inadyn==
+
You need at least a single service on an alternative mux. to the one the box is tuned to for it to work. Changing to a different service on the same mux. was found not to work reliably enough.
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plugin (see webif settings page), The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby
 
  
 +
There is no user interface, no settings and nothing to configure. The only thing you can change is the time of operation if it is not suitable!
 +
You have to do this manually by editing the /mod/bin/epgfix entry in the /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root file. This is easily available using the File Editor on the WebIf's Diagnostics page.
  
==In Use==
 
  
Utility for checking whether a recording is in use
+
==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==
  
 +
This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords.
  
==I-Phone Interface==
+
NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionality has now been moved to [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''Remote Scheduling Auto''']].
  
An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax
 
  
Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]
+
Initial Setup :-
 +
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
 +
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
 +
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL
  
  
==Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)==
+
==Epgpatch==
  
This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface, Full Details [[WebIf_Remote_Controller|'''HERE''']]
+
Utility for patching EPG information in a completed recording, it is used to fix problems in TV areas that use non standard EPG data e.g. Ireland Saorview
  
  
==lsof==
+
==Enable Telnet==
  
This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files,With no extentions it will default to 'All' open files, But it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-
+
This USB loaded package will re-enable telnet for the Custom Firmware, it performs the following command lines :-
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> lsof | grep humaxtv </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>All files opened by the main Humax TV process
+
<pre>
 +
rm -f /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/notelnet
 +
/etc/init.d/S50telnet start << /dev/null >> /dev/null 2>&1
 +
</pre>
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>List all processes that have opened files
+
==Exfat==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> lsof | grep epg </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>All files opened by the EPG process
+
This package adds support for reading and writing files in the Exfat format
  
<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
+
Please take the time to read the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ExFAT '''Wikipedia'''] article on exFAT
epg 596 root  cwd  0000  31,0 1307722938  21474853357 /dev
 
epg 596 root  rtd  0000  31,0 1321652395  77309428205 /
 
epg 596 root  txt  0000  8,18 1322689164  4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
 
epg 596 root  mem  REG  8,18                9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
 
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
 
epg 596 root  mem  REG  8,18                9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
 
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
 
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
 
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
 
epg 596 root    0  0000  31,0 1307722935  4294975926 /dev/null
 
epg 596 root    1  0000  0,13 1322848876  4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
 
epg 596 root    2  0000  0,13 1322848858  4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
 
</pre>
 
  
  
==Jim==
+
==Exfat Builder==
  
Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language), That runs on the Humax unix platform
+
'''See Exfat above'''
  
 +
[[File:exfat-panel.png|right]]
 +
'''Note that this package does not add exFAT support to your system, only provides a simple method for you to do it yourself.''' This is because there are licence and patent issues around exFAT and if we were to make the compiled exFAT code available in the repository then we would be in violation of at least some of them.
  
==Jpnevulator==
+
The package provides a web page (accessible from the standard web interface settings screen) from which you can download, build and install the required files in a single step. It will:
  
Serial Port Sniffer
+
*Download an open-source exFAT implementation from Google Code;
 +
*Unpack and modify the code to support the Humax;
 +
*Compile the files into binaries which can run on the Humax;
 +
*Install the compiled binaries on your system;
 +
*Add hooks to automatically mount exFAT disks when they are detected.
  
  
==Joe==
+
==EXTRA.css==
  
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]
+
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet|'''Webif Style Sheet''']]
  
 +
==Fan==
  
==LibParted==
+
the default fan speeds set by humax are :-
 +
*70% - once the HDD temperature reaches 55°C
 +
*65% - when the temperature drops to 54°C
 +
*55% - when the temperature drops to 51°C
 +
*0% - when the temperature drops to 49°C
  
libparted
+
This utility allows the user to set a minimum continuous fan speed between 0% and 100%, By setting a minimum fan speed higher than zero it is possible to prevent the fan reaching the noisier 70% setting. If the Humax requests a higher speed setting, this higher speed will be used
  
 +
'''Notes'''
  
==Maintenance Mode==
+
*After an initial Humax restart, this package can change the minimum fan speed on-the-fly every two minutes
 +
*The fanspeed (0 - 255) is stored in the /mod/boot/fanspeed file
 +
*Changes made by this package will be displayed in the /tmp/humaxtv.log file, if Diagnostics >> debugtv >> Run Diagnostic has been run
  
This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide [[Maintenance_Mode|'''HERE''']]
+
<pre>
 +
Editing /tmp/humaxtv.log
 +
Sun Sep 15 10:42:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 255 (ff)
 +
Sun Sep 15 10:44:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 0 (0)
 +
</pre>
  
 +
==Ffmpeg==
  
==Mediatomb==
 
A UPnP MediaServer, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in
 
  
 +
FFmpeg will record, convert, extract and stream audio and video. It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library. It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link [http://ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html '''HERE''']
  
==Mongoose==
+
NOTE:- Ffmpeg operations performed on the Humax can be very demanding on CPU time, especially when performing conversions rather than extractions. The following examples were carried out using a version of Ffmpeg running on a P.C.rather than on the Humax.
  
Mongoose is the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package uses to present the Web pages you see when you log into the Web Interface, [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]
+
Convert an extracted MP3 audio file in MP2 format to the more common MP3:-
  
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> ffmpeg -i input.ts -vn -ar 44100 -ac 2 -ab 192000 -f mp3 output.mp3</span>
  
==Multienv==
 
  
Helper utility for modifying the settop environment, Used by other packages.
+
Extract an MPG file from a Hi-Definition TS file from the Humax :-
  
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> ffmpeg -i input.ts -target pal-dvd -vcodec copy -acodec copy output.mpeg</span>
  
==Mvdisks==
+
There is also a GUI from end available for the P.C. version of ffmpeg [http://avanti.arrozcru.org/'''HERE''']
  
Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only)
 
Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB dirctory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 or the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurance of 'usb-disk' does not need changing
 
  
==Network Shares Automount==
+
==Fix-disk==
  
Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directorys to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability
+
Fix-Disk is a disk partition repair utility (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full file system check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem. A fix-disk.log file will be generated in /mod/tmp/ and can be viewed using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files
  
 +
To invoke the Fix-Disk utility follow the Maintenance Mode Guide [[Maintenance_Mode | '''HERE''']]
  
Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax
 
  
This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc). Note that the "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
+
==Fix-disk (USB)==
  
Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
+
As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [[http://www66.zippyshare.com/v/44898524/file.html '''HERE''']].
  
Wake up On LAN (WOL) is also available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds
+
==Fix Flash Packages ==
  
A script called  wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
+
If previously installed fix-flash-packages will re-install :- boot-settings, crashdiag, dbupdate, disable-dso, disable-ota, dlna-servername, ir, fan, fix-disk, multienv, multimode, newk, nugget, opkg-beta, poweron-channel, redring, rsvsync, tmenu, tunefix, tweak, undelete, virtual-disk2, webif, webshell
  
==Nano==
+
==Flatten==
  
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]
+
This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu. Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder. Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders. After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten.
  
 +
'''NOTES'''
 +
#All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
 +
#Flatten runs every 15 Minutes when the box is not in standby
  
==NTFS 3g==
+
'''Exceptions'''
  
Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access
+
* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
 +
* Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
 +
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)
  
  
==Ntp Client==
+
==Flatview==
  
Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection. Note :- This utility may also need [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Forcedate | '''Forcedate''']] to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes [http://doolittle.icarus.com/ntpclient/ '''HERE''']
+
FlatView is an alternative to flatten, it provides both a flattened view and a hierarchical view at the same time by creating a new top-level directory (called " [FlatView]" by default). Recordings appear in both without using any additional disk space
  
 +
'''NOTES'''
  
==OPKG==
+
*Recordings deleted from the flattened view area are automatically removed from the original location in the hierarchy and the original folder will be removed if it is empty;
 +
*Recordings deleted from the hierarchical view will be automatically removed from the flattened area too;
 +
*If a recording is renamed in either area, then the change will be reflected in the other (there may be a small delay);
 +
*Changes in flags such as 'Unwatched' and the resume point are synchronised across the two locations;
 +
*If you move a recording out of the flattened view area, the system will think that it has been deleted and will remove the corresponding recording from the hierarchical view area;
 +
*If you move a recording into the flattened view area, it will be left untouched
 +
*Command line option = /mod/webif/plugin/flatview/run
  
Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-
+
'''Exceptions'''
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= list all opkg commands
+
*The contents of folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not appear in [Flatview]
 +
*The contents of folders with names in square brackets [Like This] will not appear in [Flatview]
 +
*The contents of folders containing a file named .noflatten will not appear in [Flatview]
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= Install a remote package
+
==Flexget==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg list</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= list of available packages
+
FlexGet is a multi-purpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, pod-casts, comics, series, movies, etc. It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files, search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg list-installed</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= list of installed packages
+
A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg remove auto-unprotect</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> */1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron </span>
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg install undelete --force-reinstall </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= Force a package reinstall
+
* Flexget Documentation [http://flexget.com '''HERE''']
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg whatdepends anacron </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= Show dependants
 
  
 +
==Flexview==
  
==Parted==
+
FlexView is intended to offer an alternative to the traditional webif to allow you to view an manage your recording inventory in whatever way suits you
  
GNU Partition Editor
+
[[FlexView | '''See a Guide to Flexview''']]
  
  
==Popol==
+
==Forcedate==
  
A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also [[#Id3v2 |'''Id3v2''']]
+
This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is required if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Ntp_Client | '''NTP Client''']].
  
<pre>
 
  
    -s, --songname          set songname
+
==Foscam==
    -a, --artist            set artist
 
    -l, --album              set album
 
    -c, --comment            set comment
 
    -y, --year              set release year
 
    -t, --tracknum          set track number
 
  
 +
See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''HERE''']].
  
</pre>
 
  
 +
==FTP==
  
 +
File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax. The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP server for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required. Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package. If access to the whole file structure is required, programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.
  
==Portal Foscam==
+
Notes :-
 +
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
 +
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
 +
* 10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
 +
* login = humaxftp
 +
* password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used
  
See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]
 
  
 +
==Foxlink==
  
==Portal Xtra1==
+
Helper package for linking a HD Fox-T2 to a HDR, See [[Foxlink|'''Guide Here''']]
  
See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]
 
  
 +
==Fuse==
  
==Portal Xtra1 (USB)==
+
With FUSE it is possible to implement a fully functional filesystem in a userspace program.
  
There is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]
+
 +
==Genre Icons==
  
 +
It is possible to inhibit the Genre Icons displayed in the Web-If, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet | ''' Web-If Style Sheet''']]
  
==Poweron-Channel==
 
  
This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed on power down, It is also possible to select a power on volume that overrides the power down volume
+
==Git==
  
 +
Distributed version control system designed to handle everything from small to very large projects with speed and efficiency.
  
==Procps==
 
  
procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc filesystem. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link [http://procps.sourceforge.net/  '''HERE''']
+
==Grep==
  
 +
Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text. The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file.  [http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?egrep Syntax Here]
  
==Prog Backup==
+
Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep
  
Utility for backing up recordings and sidecar files to locally attached drives, A search of attatched drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-
+
<pre>
 +
humax# cat original-file.txt
  
 +
-H      Add 'filename:' prefix
 +
-h      Do not add 'filename:' prefix
 +
-n      Add 'line_no:' prefix
 +
-l      Show only names of files that match
 +
-L      Show only names of files that don't match
 +
-c      Show only count of matching lines
 +
-o      Show only the matching part of line
 +
-q      Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
 +
-v      Select non-matching lines
 +
-s      Suppress open and read errors
 +
-r      Recurse
 +
-i      Ignore case
 +
-w      Match whole words only
 +
-F      PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
 +
-E      PATTERN is an extended regexp
 +
-m N    Match up to N times per file
 +
-A N    Print N lines of trailing context
 +
-B N    Print N lines of leading context
 +
-C N    Same as '-A N -B N'
 +
-e PTRN Pattern to match
 +
-f FILE Read pattern from file
 +
 +
humax# grep match original-file.txt
 +
-l      Show only names of files that match
 +
-L      Show only names of files that don't match
 +
-c      Show only count of matching lines
 +
-o      Show only the matching part of line
 +
-v      Select non-matching lines
 +
-e PTRN Pattern to match
 +
humax#
 +
</pre>
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> progbackup</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span> Backup everthing under My Video
 
 
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/"</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span> Backup files in a specified folder
 
 
'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.
 
  
 +
==Gnu Fdisk==
  
==Redring ==
+
GNU fdisk.
  
Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings
 
  
{| border="1"
+
==Hdparm==
|+ '''GENERAL SETTINGS'''
 
! width="250"| Humax Status
 
! width="100"|Humax Default
 
! width="150"|With Redring
 
! width="100"|Redring Setting
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Show Purple When dual Recording
 
! 11% Amber
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Purple
 
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Enable Debugging Log
 
! N/A
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Debug
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 
|}
 
  
 +
hdparm is a command line utility for setting and viewing ATA hard disk drive hardware parameters. It can set parameters such as drive caches, sleep mode, power management, acoustic management, and DMA settings.
  
{| border="1"
 
|+ '''WHEN FULLY AWAKE e.g. TV Display = On'''
 
! width="250"|Humax Status
 
! width="100"|Humax Default
 
! width="150"|With Redring
 
! width="100"|Redring Setting
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Disable Screen Scrolling
 
! Scrolling On
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Scrolling Off
 
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Enable Clock
 
! Clock Off
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Clock On
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Show Elapsed Time During Playback
 
! N/A
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Elapsed Time
 
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock
 
! N/A
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | HH:MM
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
 
Blue Brightness
 
  
Red Brightness
+
==HMT==
! Fixed
+
 
100% > 50%
+
This package displays information on, and allows editing of, the Humax *.hmt file, which is a small 'side-car' file created alongside the main *.ts video file.
  
after 3 Mins.
+
From a Telnet session, navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, then enter hmt {filename}
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 
Variable
 
  
Variable
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt </span>
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 
0% to 100%
 
  
0% to 100%
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
 
Brightness
 
! Fixed
 
Fixed
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 
Variable
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 
0% to 100%
 
|}
 
  
 +
'''hmt Options List'''
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# hmt
 +
Humax HMT Tool v2.0.6, by af123, 2011-2015.
  
{| border="1"
+
Syntax: hmt [command] <filename> [filename] ...
|+ '''WHEN HALF AWAKE e.g. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search'''
+
  Commands:
! width="250"|Humax Status
+
    +/-new        Mark/unmark recording as new.
! width="100"|Humax Default
+
    +/-lock      Mark/unmark recording as locked.
! width="150"|With Redring
+
    +/-guidance  Mark/unmark recording as having guidance.
! width="100"|Redring Setting
+
    +/-protect    Enable/disable protection (prevents decryption on copy).
|-
+
    +/-encrypted  Mark/unmark recording as encrypted.
! align="left" |Show Blue LED Ring
+
    +/-shrunk    Mark/unmark recording as shrunk.
Brightness
+
    +/-dedup      Mark/unmark recording as deduped.
! Fixed
+
    +/-detectads  Mark/unmark recording as ad-detection-done.
11% Amber
+
    -p            Display parseable file information (see *).
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Blue
+
    -list        Display file information (default).
Variable
+
    -bookmarks    Display bookmarks.
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
+
    +addbookmark=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
10% to 100%
+
    +setbookmarks=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
|-
+
    +clearbookmarks
! align="left" |Show Red LED Ring (Recording)
+
    +settitle=<new title>
Brightness
+
    +setsynopsis=<new synopsis>
! Fixed
+
    +setguidance=<new guidance>
11% Amber
+
    +setfolder=<new folder> (patch hmt only)
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Red
+
    +setfilename=<new filename> (patch hmt only)
Variable
+
    +setgenre=<genre> (can just specifiy initial part)
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
+
    +setresume=<resume point (seconds)> (-seconds to set from end)
10% to 100%
+
 
|}
+
Generic patch commands:
 +
    +patch8=offset:value    patch 8-bit value
 +
    +patch16=offset:value    patch 16-bit value
 +
    +patch32=offset:value    patch 32-bit value
 +
  Offset and value can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.
 +
 
 +
Generic read commands:
 +
    +read8=offset            read 8-bit value
 +
    +read16=offset          read 16-bit value
 +
    +read32=offset          read 32-bit value
 +
  Offset can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.
 +
 
 +
* Parseable output is tab delimited and contains the following fields:
 +
        Title, Synopsis, HD/SD, LCN, Channel Name,
 +
        Start time, End time, Flags, Guidance, Bookmark count,
 +
        Scheduled start, Scheduled duration, Genre code,
 +
        Resume point, Status/Reason.
  
  
{| border="1"
+
</pre>
|+ '''WHEN IN STANDBY e.g. Hard Disk Not Spinning'''
 
! width="250"|Humax Status
 
! width="100"|Humax Default
 
! width="150"|With Redring
 
! width="100"|Redring Setting
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
 
Brightness
 
! Fixed
 
11% Amber
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 
Amber Brightness
 
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 
0% to 100%
 
|-
 
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
 
Brightness
 
! Fixed
 
11%
 
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 
Variable
 
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 
0% to 100%
 
|}
 
  
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
*+addbookmark=100:200:300 = Add to existing bookmark list
 +
*+setbookmarks=100:200:300 = replace bookmark list with this new ones
 +
*+setbookmarks= = same as +clearbookmarks i.e. remove all bookmarks
  
<span style="color:#ffbbbb; background:#FFbbbb"> HIDE </span><span style="color:#ffffff;"> ** </span> = Change from Humax default
+
==hmt-linux==
  
 +
A version of hmt compiled to run on a Linux platform (not for the Humax)
  
==Renumber==
 
[[File:renumber.png|200px|thumb|right]]
 
Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.
 
  
Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.
+
==hmt-solaris==
  
 +
A version of hmt compiled to run on a Solaris platform (not for the Humax)
  
==Reset Webif==
 
  
Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be execuable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.
+
==Hrwconv==
  
 +
Wrapper script for ffmpeg and sidecar packages to convert 9200T/9150T/9300T files to HDR format
  
==Remote Scheduling (RS)==
+
It is recommended that you create a new directory and move your existing 9200T/9150T/9300T files and their sidecars into it, Hrwconv will not make any changes to the originals but will create new files so you will need to ensure that you have enough free disk space.
  
Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser
+
After installing the package, connect to the Humax via Telnet, change directory 'cd' to the new directory and then run:-
 +
 
 +
<pre>hrwconv *.ts</pre>
 +
 
 +
After a few hours the new files will have been created in the subdirectory  'new'
 +
 
 +
==HTTPS==
 +
 
 +
HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is an extra layer built into the normal HTTP protocol used to access the Web-Interface for the Humax, It provides a more secure connection to the Humax. An HTTPS Server can be enabled in Web-If >> Settings >> General Settings >> HTTPS web server = On
  
Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]
 
  
 +
==Humaxrw==
  
==Remote Scheduling Auto==
+
Utility to copy recordings from a Humax 9200T/9150T/9300T hard disk that is connected to the HDR via USB. The files recorded on 9000 series Humaxs are playable on the HDR, however the HDR can't directly read a hard disk formatted on a 9000 series, Humaxrw will allow the transfer of files between 9000 series and the HDR.
  
Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]
+
After installing Humaxrw, access to the utility is by [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet | '''Telnet''']] command line.
  
  
==Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode==
 
  
Full Guide[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]
+
<pre>
 +
humax# humaxrw -h
 +
Host <-> Humax disk
 +
===================
 +
Usage: humaxrw [options] HUMAXDISK
  
 +
  -b            backup all recordings from Humax disk to current directory
 +
  -d <list>    delete recordings
 +
  -g <list>    get recordings to current directory
 +
  -h            help (this text)
 +
  -i <list>    get info for recordings
 +
  -l            list recordings
 +
  -p <filename> put recording(s) onto Humax disk
 +
  -u <list>    unprotect recordings
 +
  -v            version
 +
  -x            extended listing for humaxdiag
 +
  -w            pause at the end waiting for a keypress
 +
  -y            answer yes to all prompts
  
==Remote Scheduling Mobile==
+
  Advanced Options
 +
  -D            Delete time shift recording buffers
 +
  -E            Update all synopsis/info data for version 1.00.20 or later
 +
  -H <list>    get hre files for recordings
 +
  -M <n>        modify recording number n (use with -O & -V options)
 +
  -O <n>        offset for modify recording (use with -M & -V options)
 +
  -V <n>        modify recording value (use with -M & -O options)
 +
  -Z            Delete EPG save data
  
Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Mobile_Edition#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]
+
Humax disk -> Humax disk
 +
========================
 +
Usage: humaxrw [options] SRCHUMAXDISK DESTHUMAXDISK
  
 +
  -b            backup all recordings from source Humax disk
 +
                and copy to destination Humax disk
 +
  -g <list>    get recordings from source disk
 +
                and copy to destination Humax disk
  
==Rsvsync==
+
Recovery mode - use if record list is missing/corrupt
 +
=============
 +
Usage: humaxrw -r [options] HUMAXDISK
  
Boot-time reservation sync service
+
  -i <list>    get info for recordings
 +
  -l            list recordings
 +
  -n            no info - use if corruption is really bad
 +
  -g <list>    get recordings to current directory as recover_nnnn.ts
  
 +
Example of a list: 10-20,30,41-42
 +
</pre>
  
==Rsync==
+
==Humidify==
  
A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-
+
A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files.
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# humidify
 +
HDF Tool v1.0.4, by af123, 2011-2015.
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup </span>
+
Syntax: humidify [options] <filename>
 +
  -C                  Skip checksum validation.
 +
  -c <arguments>      Create HDF file ('-c help' for more).
 +
  -d<level>            Enable debugging at level.
 +
  -l                  Show contents of HDF file (default).
 +
  -o                  Use old-style checksum blocks when creating.
 +
  -r                  Don't compress blocks when creating.
 +
  -S<section>          Extract only the numbered section.
 +
  -t                  Test archive (validate checksums).
 +
  -x                  Extract files.
 +
  -s                  Also show/extract member checksums.
  
  
==Samba==
+
Examples:
  
Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax filesystem from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols
+
  View HDF:    humidify file.hdf
 +
  Test HDF:    humidify -t file.hdf
 +
  Extract HDF: humidify -x file.hdf
 +
  Create HDF:  humidify -c file.hdf (run 'humidify -c help' for more)
  
 +
</pre>
  
==Screensaver==
 
  
If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :- /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plugins using the Web-If >> Settings screen
+
A cross platform version of Humidify can be downloaded from the packages page, [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''HERE''']]
 +
It contains the following files:-
  
When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plugin shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-
+
[[File:Humidify-1.0.2.zip.jpg]]
  
  
{| border="1"
+
==Hwctl==
|-
+
 
!3X5
+
Hardware control utility - Use with caution ! ! !
>>>
+
 
|[[File:3X5.png|200px]]  
+
 
!Neon
+
==Id3v2==
>>>
+
 
|[[File:neon.png|200px]]
+
A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also [[#Popol |'''Popol''']].
!Avatar
+
 
>>>
+
Available commands:
|[[File:avatar.png|200px]]  
+
 
|-
+
<pre>
! 7Seg
+
  -h,  --help              Display this help and exit
>>>
+
  -f, --list-frames        Display all possible frames for id3v2
| [[File:7Seg.png|200px]]
+
  -L,  --list-genres        Lists all id3v1 genres
! Neon-Blue
+
  -v,  --version            Display version information and exit
>>>
+
  -l,  --list              Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
| [[File:neon-blue.png|200px]]
+
  -R,  --list-rfc822        Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
!Wedge
+
  -d,  --delete-v2          Deletes id3v2 tags
>>>
+
  -s,  --delete-v1          Deletes id3v1 tags
|[[File:Wedge.png|200px]]
+
  -D,  --delete-all        Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
|-
+
  -C,  --convert            Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
! Dot
+
  -1,  --id3v1-only        Writes only id3v1 tag
>>>
+
  -2,  --id3v2-only        Writes only id3v2 tag
| [[File:Dot.png|200px]]
+
  -a,  --artist  "ARTIST"  Set the artist information
! Agen
+
  -A,  --album  "ALBUM"    Set the album title information
>>>
+
  -t,  --song    "SONG"    Set the song title information
| [[File:Agen.png|200px]]
+
  -c,  --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
!Cursor
+
                            Set the comment information (both
>>>
+
                            description and language optional)
|[[File:Cursor.png|200px]]
+
  -g,  --genre  num        Set the genre number
|-
+
  -y,  --year    num        Set the year
! VFD
+
  -T,  --track  num/num    Set the track number/(optional) total tracks
>>>
 
| [[File:VFD.png|200px]]
 
! Glass-Blue
 
>>>
 
| [[File:glass-b.png|200px]]
 
!Black
 
>>>
 
|[[File:black.png|200px]]
 
|}
 
  
'''screensaver-all''' = Install all current screensavers from the package server
+
You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
 +
For example:
 +
        id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
 +
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".
 +
</pre>
  
''' screensaver-random''' = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers
 
  
Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plugins as follows e.g.:-
+
==Inadyn==
 +
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plug-in (see webif settings page). The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby.
  
<pre>
+
For freedns.afraid.org the hostname in settings should be of the form:
humax# screensaver
+
xxxx.xxxxxxxx.xxxxx, <user name hash>
  1: 3X5
+
Where <user name hash> is obtained from the freedns website, when logged on
  2: 7Seg
 
  3: Black
 
  4: Cursor
 
  5: Humax Default
 
  6: Neon
 
  7: Neon-Blue
 
  8: VFD
 
Choose option [1-8]:</pre>
 
'''NOTE:-''' The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
 
  
 +
==In Use==
 +
 +
Utility for checking whether a recording is in use.
  
==Sed==
 
  
GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/manual/sed.html '''HERE'''] or  [http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Sed.html#uh-0 '''HERE''']
+
==I-Phone Interface==
  
==Series Filer==
+
An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax.
  
This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode
+
Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']].
  
'''NOTE:-'''
 
  
The current version of Series Filer ver. 2.1a is not compatable with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory is not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer ver. 2.1a with any version of the Undlete package
+
==Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)==
  
 +
This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface. Full Details [[WebIf_Remote_Controller|'''HERE''']].
  
==Service Control==
 
  
A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.
+
==lsof==
  
 +
This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files. With no extensions it will default to 'All' open files, but it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-
  
From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> lsof | grep humaxtv </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>All files opened by the main Humax TV process
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> service </span>
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>List all processes that have opened files
<pre>
 
humax# service
 
  
Name                Installed  Autostart  Running
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> lsof | grep epg </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>All files opened by the EPG process
----                ---------  ---------  -------
 
mediatomb            No        No        No
 
dropbear            No        No        No
 
transmission        No        No        No
 
samba                No        No        No
 
cifs                No        No        No
 
mongoose            Yes        Yes        Yes
 
  
Syntax:
+
<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
        service start <service>
+
epg 596 root  cwd  0000  31,0 1307722938  21474853357 /dev
        service stop <service>
+
epg 596 root  rtd  0000  31,0 1321652395  77309428205 /
        service auto <service>          (toggles autostart) </pre>
+
epg 596 root  txt  0000  8,18 1322689164  4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
 +
epg 596 root  mem  REG  8,18                9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
 +
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
 +
epg 596 root  mem  REG  8,18                9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
 +
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
 +
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
 +
epg 596 root  mem  REG  31,0                    186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
 +
epg 596 root    0  0000  31,0 1307722935  4294975926 /dev/null
 +
epg 596 root    1  0000  0,13 1322848876  4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
 +
epg 596 root    2  0000  0,13 1322848858  4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
 +
</pre>
  
  
==Sh (SHell)==
+
==Jim==
 +
 
 +
Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language) that runs on the Humax unix platform.
  
Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language
 
  
==Smartmontools==
+
==Jpnevulator==
  
This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T.  hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-
+
Serial Port Sniffer.
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A </span>
 
  
or
+
==Joe==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>for more details
+
Text Editor. See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']].
  
Documentation [http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/smartmontools/wiki/TocDoc'''HERE''']
 
<pre>
 
  
humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
+
==Kernels==
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
 
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net
 
  
=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
+
An alternative Kernel for the HDR-Fox T2 is loadable via USB upgrade, the zip files contains copies of the standard kernels and a version with GUID/EFI support
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
 
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
 
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME          FLAG    VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE      UPDATED  WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
 
  1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate    0x000f  114  099  006    Pre-fail Always      -      66811863
 
  3 Spin_Up_Time            0x0003  097  097  000    Pre-fail  Always      -      0
 
  4 Start_Stop_Count        0x0032  098  098  020    Old_age  Always      -      2878
 
  5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct  0x0033  100  100  036    Pre-fail  Always      -      0
 
  7 Seek_Error_Rate        0x000f  078  060  030    Pre-fail  Always      -      70502101
 
  9 Power_On_Hours          0x0032  097  097  000    Old_age  Always      -      3294
 
10 Spin_Retry_Count        0x0013  100  100  097    Pre-fail  Always      -      0
 
12 Power_Cycle_Count      0x0032  099  099  020    Old_age  Always      -      1439
 
184 End-to-End_Error        0x0032  100  100  099    Old_age  Always      -      0
 
187 Reported_Uncorrect      0x0032  097  097  000    Old_age  Always      -      3
 
188 Command_Timeout        0x0032  100  100  000    Old_age  Always      -      0
 
189 High_Fly_Writes        0x003a  093  093  000    Old_age  Always      -      7
 
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022  055  044  045    Old_age  Always  In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
 
194 Temperature_Celsius    0x0022  045  056  000    Old_age  Always      -      45 (0 13 0 0)
 
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered  0x001a  048  039  000    Old_age  Always      -      66811863
 
197 Current_Pending_Sector  0x0012  100  100  000    Old_age  Always      -      0
 
198 Offline_Uncorrectable  0x0010  100  100  000    Old_age  Offline      -      0
 
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count    0x003e  200  200  000    Old_age  Always      -      0
 
</pre>
 
  
NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda
 
  
 +
==Lighttpd==
 +
 +
Lighttpd is a replacement for the mongoose Web server used on the Humax to handle it's Web-If pages. [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]
  
==SQLite==
+
For more information on lighttpd click [http://www.lighttpd.net/  '''HERE''']
  
SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc.
 
  
 +
==LDD==
  
==SSMTP==
+
ldd prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library specified on the command line
  
SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a  mailhost or mailhub, It will not handle incomming E-Mail
 
  
 +
==Libpcre==
  
==Stripts==
+
Perl-compatible Regular Expressions Library
This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> stripts -F filename</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Fix file
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> stripts -f filename</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= remove redundant EIT packets
+
==Libunwind==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> stripts -v filename</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Verbose
+
Utility used with the Crashdiag package
  
==Sysmon==
 
  
A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-
+
==LibParted==
  
*Hard Disk Temperature
+
Library for the [[#Parted|'''Parted''']] package
  
Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Smartmontools | '''Smartmontools''']]
 
package, options are to display last 2 hours, 1, 5, 10, 30 Days
 
  
 +
==Libsndfile==
  
*CPU Utilisation
+
A C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound.
  
Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 hours, 1, 5, 10, 30 Days
 
  
 +
==Loaders==
  
==Telnet==
+
{{Warning|title=WARNING !|Although the installation of a new loader only takes a few seconds (unlike a full firmware change), it is imperative that there is no power interruption during the process as this could cause the Humax to become permanently inoperative (bricked)}}
  
Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html '''PuTTY'''], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will  see the humax# prompt.
+
The Loader - sometimes called the Boot Loader is a small routine that the Humax runs on start-up, the version of your Loader is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the Humax screen immediately after the unit is taken out of standby, there are currently 4 loader versions known to be installed on the HDR-Fox T2, they are :-
 +
a730, a731, a733 and a734.
  
 +
Different versions of loader may improve 'Green Screen' HDMI handshake problems found on some televisions, a link to the hummy.tv discussion can be found [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/hdmi-issue-with-bravia.8203/page-2#post-116204 '''HERE''']
  
It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet
 
  
See '''<span style="color:#FF0000"> RED </span>''' setup notes below, to prevent errors when entering text
+
==M4==
  
Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet
+
GNU M4 is an implementation of the traditional Unix macro processor. More notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/m4/ '''HERE''']
  
Follow [[Telnet |'''THIS LINK''']] for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection
 
  
Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for <span style="background:#FFFF00"> ls -al </span>
+
==Maintenance Mode==
  
<pre>
+
This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in, to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide [[Maintenance_Mode|'''HERE''']]
C:\> telnet
 
  
Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client  Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'
+
==Mediatomb==
 +
A UPnP Media Server, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in. There is a user Guide [http://mediatomb.cc/pages/documentation '''HERE''']
  
open 10.0.0.200
+
==Mongoose==
  
humax# ls -al
+
Mongoose was the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package used to present Web pages, it has been replaced by Lighttpd.  
total 17
 
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root  192 Jan 10 09:10 .
 
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root  192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
 
drwxr-xr-x  2 root root  474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
 
.......
 
drwxr-xr-x  4 root root  88 Jan 10 09:10 var
 
humax#
 
  
to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d
 
  
Microsoft Telnet >
+
==Multienv==
to exit from Telnet enter q
 
C:\>
 
</pre>
 
  
NOTES
+
Helper utility for modifying the set top environment, Used by other packages.
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a <span style="background:#FFFF00"> Yellow Background </span>
 
*'''<span style="color:#FF0000"> [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' </span>'''
 
*'''<span style="color:#FF0000"> [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf </span>'''
 
  
  
==Text Editors==
+
==Multi-mode==
  
There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#File Editor |'''HERE''']]). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vi |'''Vi''']] built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware).  There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Basic |'''Vim Basic''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Standard | '''Vim Standard''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Joe | '''Joe''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nano | '''Nano''']].
+
[[Multi-mode_Recording | '''See Guide HERE''']]
  
If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's
 
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sed | '''sed''']]
 
  
 +
==Mvdisks==
  
==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==
+
Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only)
 +
Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB directory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 of the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurrence of 'usb-disk' does not need changing
  
The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.
+
*Allows recording directly to a USB drive on the HDR
 +
*Allows files on a USB drive to be served via DLNA (HDR only)
  
Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from
 
  
For command line access enter :-
+
==Network Shares Automount==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> transmission-remote </span>
+
Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directories to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability
  
/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. [[https://trac.transmissionbt.com/wiki/EditConfigFiles '''HERE''']]
 
  
 +
Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the Humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax
  
'''Blocklist Notes'''
+
This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc).
  
The block list utility does not currently work as it should e.g. Settings (Bottom Left) >> preferences >> Peers should allow an IP to be entered and then 'Updated', This should read a txt, gz, zip file to opened from a remote site that holds details of URLs that transmission is not allowed to contact during the download process. This can increase security by avoiding know virus sites etc.
+
'''Notes'''
  
Because the ‘Update’ does not work it is necessary to obtain the block file (e.g. from http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php) and place them in the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be  created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules
+
#The "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
 +
#Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
 +
#Wake up On LAN (WOL) is available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds. A script called wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
 +
#If option ShareFolder = off, the mount will appear in the USB section and either a real USB device or virtual2 must be installed
 +
#If option ShareFolder = on, the mount will appear under 'My Video'
 +
[[File:warning-anim.gif|100px|left]]
 +
'''<span style="color:#FF0000"> DELETING THE MY VIDEO/[SHARES] FOLDER WILL DELETE FILES ON YOUR REMOTE COMPUTER / LAPTOP/ NAS ETC. </span>'''
  
*Go into service control and start Transmission
 
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
 
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
 
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
 
*Select browse in the window and highlight the prviously downloaded *.torrent file
 
*When highlighted select 'Open'
 
*Select 'Upload'
 
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
 
* A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads
 
  
 +
To safely remove the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder :-
 +
#Delete the configuration file created in [ModSettings]/NFS or [Modsettings]/SMB
 +
#reboot the Humax
 +
#Ensure there are no active shares in the [Shares] folder
 +
#Turn off the remote device holding the shared files
 +
#Delete the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder
  
==trm==
 
  
trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources
+
==Nano==
  
 +
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]
  
==TTYSnoop==
 
  
TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.
+
==New Portal==
  
 +
This package adds a new front-end to the standard Humax TV Portal, See guide [[Custom_TV_Portal | ''' HERE''']]
  
==Uinput==
+
==Newk==
  
User-space input kernel module
+
This utility will create a folder on the hard disk with a chosen prefix removed, in order to tidy-up the folder title, so for example when recording a new series called "New: The Walking Dead" a folder will be created called "The Walking Dead" and all new recordings will be placed into it, if the prefix "New: " is placed in Webif >> Settings >> Automatic Series Prefix Removal settings.
  
 +
Note:- Existing series folder will not be renamed by the Newk package
  
==Unencrypt==
 
  
This function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are de-crypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results
+
==Nicesplice==
  
To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet|'''Telnet''']] enter one of the lines below :-
+
A recorded program editing utility, See [[Edit_On_Box | '''Edit On box Guide''']], Nicesplice also 'Shrinks' the file using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts|'''Stripts''']]
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>process a single directory
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> unencryptsetup </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>process all files in 'My Video'
+
==Nsplice==
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> unencryptsetup disable</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>Turn off unencrypt
+
Nsplice is supplied with the '''[[DetectAds]]''' package, it is a version of the Nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.
  
This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.
 
  
NOTES:-
+
==NTFS 3g==
*<span style="color:#ff0000"> '''Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer''' </span>
 
  
*It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
+
Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can only read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access
<pre>
 
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
 
</pre>
 
  
*Auto-Unprotect must be running
 
*Content sharing must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings
 
  
See Decryption flow chart [[Encryption | '''HERE''']]
+
==NTFS Progs==
  
 +
This utility contains diagnostic tools and a utililty to format a partition as NTFS
  
  
==Undelete==
+
==Ntp Client==
  
Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
+
Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection or your Humax doesn't keep good time. Ntpclient runs with the -l option which also adjusts the time in between system boots.
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)
 
  
 +
Note :- This utility may also need [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Forcedate | '''Forcedate''']] to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes [http://doolittle.icarus.com/ntpclient/ '''HERE''']
  
==Vi==
 
  
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']]  package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).
+
==Nugget==
  
 +
Nugget framework, handles a number of utilities sent from the commeand line, current option are :-
  
==Vim Basic==
+
<pre>
 +
nugget <command>
 +
  ping            - Test nugget connectivity.
 +
  status          - Show nugget status and version.
 +
  schedule.load    - Load recording schedule from disk.
 +
  schedule.save    - Save recording schedule to disk.
 +
  schedule.slot    - Update timers for schedule slot.
 +
  schedule.db      - sqlite3 database handle info.
 +
  schedule.epg    - Display EPG information for slot.
 +
  schedule.timers  - Show internal timers.
 +
  cryptokey        - Set or display encryption key.
 +
</pre>
  
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]
+
==OPKG==
  
 +
Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-
  
==Vim Standard==
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= list all opkg commands
  
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= Install a remote package
  
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg download auto-unprotect </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= download current version of a remote package (Version number not allowed)
  
==Virtual-Disk==
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg list</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= list of available packages
  
One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg list-installed</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= list of installed packages
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
 
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
 
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared
 
  
Note:- The copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00">opkg remove auto-unprotect</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers
  
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg install undelete --force-reinstall </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= Force a package reinstall
  
==Web IF ==
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> opkg whatdepends anacron </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF">HID</span>= Show dependants
  
[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']]<span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>[[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]
 
  
An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
+
==Opkg-beta==
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
 
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser
 
  
Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-
+
When this package is installed beta versions of installed packages will be made available in 'Package Management >> Upgrades' screen
  
===Backup/Restore Schedule===
 
[[File:Backup.png|70px|thumb|right]]
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events
+
==Parted==
  
This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the /mod/var/backup/ folder
+
GNU Partition Editor. On-line User Manual [http://www.gnu.org/software/parted/manual/parted.html#Introduction '''HERE]
  
===Clipboard===
+
==Popol==
  
Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard
+
A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also [[#Id3v2 |'''Id3v2''']]
  
===Copy===
+
<pre>
  
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]
+
    -s, --songname          set songname
 +
    -a, --artist            set artist
 +
    -l, --album              set album
 +
    -c, --comment            set comment
 +
    -y, --year              set release year
 +
    -t, --tracknum          set track number
  
===Crop===
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop
+
</pre>
  
See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]
 
  
===Cut===
+
==Portal Foscam==
  
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]
+
See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]
  
===Enable Auto-Shrink===
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink
+
==Portal Xtra1==
  
Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Shrink_.28stripts.29 |'''Shrink''']])
+
See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]
  
===Enable Auto-Dedup===
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup
+
==Portal Xtra1 (USB)==
  
Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Dedup_.28Command_Line.29 |'''Dedup''']])
+
This is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]
  
===Enable Auto-Decrypt===
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt
+
==Poweron-Channel==
  
Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Decrypt |'''Decrypt''']])
+
NOTE:- This package was replaced by the Boot-Settings package with the release of Webif 1.4
  
===Delete===
+
This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed, After installing the Poweron-Channel package, select options in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for poc package >> Click here for settings
  
Remove file or folder
 
  
===Decrypt===
+
*Power-On Channel = Selected TV Channel for start-up (See note 1)
 +
*Volume = 0-20 or Last Audio Volume
 +
*Power-On Channel Group = Select Favourites List or None
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt
 
  
This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTE both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
+
*Disable Subtitles on every boot (See Note 3)
 +
*Turn the DLNA server on at every boot (See Note 3)
  
===De-duplicate / Tidy this folder===
 
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
 
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder
+
'''NOTES'''
 +
# Ensure that the selected Poweron TV channel is included in the selected Favourite group
 +
#A scheduled wake-up will use the channel set in the on-TV menus at Settings>>Preferences>>Time>>Channel not the Power-On Channel settings
 +
# Only available by editing /mod/boot/pox using Diagnostics >> File Editor (details below)
 +
# The parameters set by Poweron-Channel are contained in the /var/lib/humaxtv/setup.db database, other items may be added to the pox file from this database, but please use extreme caution, their functions are not fully understood
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# cat /mod/boot/pox
 +
# Poweron-channel additional options.
  
This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also seperate duplicates into a new folder
+
# Example: uncomment the following line to disable subtitles on every boot
 +
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:SUBTITLE_DISPLAY_F:1
  
See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>
+
# Example: uncomment the following line to turn the DLNA server on at each
 +
# boot in case it has been turned off.
 +
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:DMS_START_ON:1
  
This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles
+
</pre>
  
It will Also seperate duplicates into a new folder
 
  
See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>
+
==Procps==
  
===Download===
+
procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc file system. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link [http://procps.sourceforge.net/  '''HERE''']
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download
 
  
This function will download with decrytion an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-
+
==Prog Backup==
  
# The File type *.TS must not be assosiated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
+
Utility for backing up recordings and side-car files to locally attached drives, A search of attached drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-
# Your brouser must allow re-direction of addresses
 
  
===Extract Audio===
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> progbackup</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span> Backup everything under My Video
  
This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard  Def.  Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-
+
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/"</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span> Backup files in a specified folder
  
*The file must be de-crypted (Dispays a DEC against it)
+
'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.
*ffmpeg package must be installed
 
*Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
 
*The extracted MP3 file is an MP2 Layer 7 file (also called MP2 Audio), not the more common MP2 Layer 3, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out due to amount of CPU usage required
 
 
===Extract To MPG===
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG
 
  
This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-
+
==Python==
  
*The file must be de-crypted (Dispays a DEC against it)
+
A package that adds the Python programming language
*ffmpeg package must be installed
 
*Standard Def. recording only
 
  
===File Editor===
 
  
Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to deisired file]
+
==Python Setuptools==
  
===Lock===
+
Setup tools including Easy_Install for the Python programming language, see notes [[http://pypi.python.org/pypi/setuptools#using-setuptools-and-easyinstall|'''HERE''']]
  
Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion
 
  
===Mark as Watched===
+
==Qtube==
  
Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol
+
Simple webif to queue youtube downloads to run in the Auto process queue, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Youtube-dl | '''Youtube-dl''']]
  
===Multi Mode Recording===
 
  
This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Acurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See [[Multi-mode_Recording|'''Guide Here''']]
+
==Recmon==
  
===Paste===
+
Utility for executing another process whenever a recording starts or finishes
  
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]
+
Recmon runs every script in /mod/etc/recmon.d in response to events. The order that they are run in is not guaranteed (they actually run in parallel).
 +
The commands are run with two arguments, a switch saying which event triggered this and the base name of the recording file (no extension).
  
[[File:Webif-media-detail.png|100px|thumb|right]]
+
e.g.
  
===Play===
+
/mod/etc/recmon.d/test -start "/media/My Video/path/to/recording"
  
This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plugin installed for your browser
+
Flags are -start, -stop, -move and -delete. Usually -move is called twice, once for the source location and once for the destination.
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Click on Single File) >> Play
 
  
===Rename===
+
Examples
 +
<pre>
 +
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -start "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
 +
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -stop "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
 +
</pre>
  
Change the name of a file or folder
+
==Rc app bridge==
  
===Reset New Flag===
+
Utility that enables the Humax HDR-Fox T2 to be controlled by the  TV Remote App. (supplied by Humax) that runs on the I-Phone, the same App. is also available on the Android platform, however version HMARG 1.0.4 does not appear to work with this package
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> Folder >> Reset New Flag
+
'''Notes'''
 +
* This package requires Content Share to be enabled
  
Mark a Folder as containing new material
 
  
===Save Last Streamed Content===
+
==Real Time Scheduling (RTS)==
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> Save Last Streamed Content
+
When the Custom Firmware was developed, Scheduled events created in the Web-If or Via Remote Scheduling were placed into a pending queue and only moved into the main schedule on the next boot or reboot, In Web-If version 1.3.2-1 and later, it is possible to automatically progress from the 'Pending' stage directly to a fully scheduled stage without the Humax having to perform a boot cycle. This option can be enabled / disabled with the :- Settings >> Advanced Settings >> Real Time Scheduling Yes / No option
  
This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-
 
  
<span style="background:#FFFF00">cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" </span>
+
==Redring ==
  
NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed
+
Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings
  
===Split===
+
{| border="1"
 +
|+ '''GENERAL SETTINGS'''
 +
! width="250"| Humax Status
 +
! width="100"|Humax Default
 +
! width="150"|With Redring
 +
! width="100"|Redring Setting
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Show Purple When dual Recording
 +
! 11% Amber
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Purple
 +
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Enable Debugging Log
 +
! N/A
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Debug
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1"
 +
|+ '''WHEN FULLY AWAKE i.e. TV Display = On'''
 +
! width="250"|Humax Status
 +
! width="100"|Humax Default
 +
! width="150"|With Redring
 +
! width="100"|Redring Setting
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Disable Screen Scrolling
 +
! Scrolling On
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Scrolling Off
 +
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Enable Clock
 +
! Clock Off
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Clock On
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Show Elapsed Time During Playback
 +
! N/A
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Elapsed Time
 +
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock
 +
! N/A
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | HH:MM
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
 +
Blue Brightness
 +
 
 +
Red Brightness
 +
! Fixed
 +
100% > 50%
 +
 
 +
after 3 Mins.
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 +
Variable
 +
 
 +
Variable
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 +
0% to 100%
 +
 
 +
0% to 100%
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
 +
Brightness
 +
! Fixed
 +
Fixed
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 +
Variable
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 +
0% to 100%
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Override Playback Display Brightness
 +
Brightness
 +
! Fixed
 +
Fixed
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 +
Variable
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
 +
0% to 100%
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1"
 +
|+ '''WHEN HALF AWAKE i.e. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search'''
 +
! width="250"|Humax Status
 +
! width="100"|Humax Default
 +
! width="150"|With Redring
 +
! width="100"|Redring Setting
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Show Blue LED Ring
 +
Brightness
 +
! Fixed
 +
11% Amber
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Blue
 +
Variable
 +
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 +
10% to 100%
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Show Red LED Ring (Recording)
 +
Brightness
 +
! Fixed
 +
11% Amber
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Red
 +
Variable
 +
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 +
10% to 100%
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1"
 +
|+ '''WHEN IN STANDBY i.e. Hard Disk Not Spinning'''
 +
! width="250"|Humax Status
 +
! width="100"|Humax Default
 +
! width="150"|With Redring
 +
! width="100"|Redring Setting
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
 +
Brightness
 +
! Fixed
 +
11% Amber
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 +
Amber Brightness
 +
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 +
0% to 100%
 +
|-
 +
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
 +
Brightness
 +
! Fixed
 +
11%
 +
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
 +
Variable
 +
!  bgcolor=#ffbbbb |  On / Off
 +
0% to 100%
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
<span style="color:#ffbbbb; background:#FFbbbb"> HIDE </span><span style="color:#ffffff;"> ** </span> = Change from Humax default
 +
 
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
 
 +
*Redring can cause slight delay of Remote Control key presses, e.g. Pause etc.
 +
*Problems writing to the /mod/tmp/redring.log will be listed in the /var/log/humaxtv.log after diagnostics >> debugtv is run
 +
 
 +
==Renumber==
 +
[[File:renumber.png|200px|thumb|right]]
 +
Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.
 +
 
 +
Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.
 +
 
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
 
 +
*The renumber settings appears under the "reorder" section of the settings page on the Web-If
 +
*The [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tunefix | '''Tune Fix''']] package has replaced the Renumber package
 +
 
 +
==Reset Webif==
 +
 
 +
Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be executable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Remote Scheduling (RS)==
 +
 
 +
Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser
 +
 
 +
Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Remote Scheduling Auto==
 +
 
 +
Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode==
 +
 
 +
Full Guide[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Remote Scheduling Mobile==
 +
 
 +
Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Mobile_Edition#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
==rs==
 +
 
 +
Command line tool that carries out a number of functions relating to the Remote Scheduling service, e.g. :-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# rs
 +
Humax Remote Scheduling Tool v1.3.1, by af123, 2011-2015.
 +
 
 +
Syntax: rs [options] <command>...
 +
 
 +
  Options:
 +
    -d[level]              Set debug level.
 +
    -D<seconds>            Sleep for random(seconds).
 +
    -h                    Show help text.
 +
    -i                    Show detected machine info.
 +
    -q                    Be more quiet.
 +
 
 +
  Commands:
 +
    register <email>      Register this device.
 +
    push                  Push scheduled events.
 +
    cmd                    Retrieve next queued command.
 +
    ack <id>              Acknowledge command <id>.
 +
    status                Show device registration status.
 +
    log <msg>              Send log message to server.
 +
    epg                    Distributed EPG management.
 +
 
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
==rs time==
 +
 
 +
Command line utility that returns a number in seconds, that indicates the time offset between your Humax unit and the Remote Servers time
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==RMA==
 +
 
 +
The Return to MAnufacturer Web-If option under [[Diagnostic_Utilities  |'''Diagnostics''']] removes Custom Firmware files from the internal hard disk drive of the HDR Fox T2, following an RMA the user should re-install a version of official Humax Software to complete the 'Out of the Box' status of the Humax
 +
 
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
* After running the procedure, 'RMA' will be displayed in the front panel display, this message should be removed after the official Humax Software is installed, however if the message is still present, it is possible to remove it by running the [[#DeRMA | '''DeRMA''']] USB package
 +
* More options for removing the Custom Firmware are detailed in the [[Remove_Modified_Firmware | '''Remove Modified Firmware''']] page
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Rsvsync==
 +
 
 +
Boot-time reservation sync service
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Rsync==
 +
 
 +
A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup </span>
 +
 
 +
This [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Cron|'''cronjob''']] example would run at 01:05 each day, keeping the internal and external disks in sync - you just need to ensure the box is on at that time via a reminder or other mechanism.
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> 5 1 * * * /mod/bin/rsync --archive --delete-after --log-file=/mod/tmp/rsync.log /media/My\ Video/ /media/drive1/Video/ </span>
 +
 
 +
The Custom Firmware and Humax setup can be copied from an existing Humax to a new Humax by installing the rsync and dropbear packages on both units and then entering Maintenance Mode on the new Humax and sending the following two command lines :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/var/lib/humaxtv/ /var/lib/humaxtv/ </span>
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/mnt/hd2/mod/ /mnt/hd2/mod/ </span>
 +
 
 +
[http://ss64.com/bash/rsync.html  '''More Info.''']
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==rt3070==
 +
 
 +
This package was a replacement wireless driver which allowed for a wider range of wireless dongle vendor types, it was removed from the packages list because version 1.0 is not compatible with the latest 1.03.XX versions of Custom firmware
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Safe Mode==
 +
 
 +
Safe Mode is a package loaded onto the Humax via USB in the same way as a software upgrade, it temporarily switches off most Custom Firmware components (apart from a small web server that allows you to get back out of safe more when you want), there is a package called enablesafemode.spk to turn this feature on and another called disablesafemode.spk to turn it back off, they are available frrom the [[Firmware_Downloads | '''Firmware Download page''']]
 +
 
 +
'''Note''' if you have altered the encryption keys on your humax that any recordings made in safe mode will be made using the standard encryption and won't be, automatically, viewable when you return to normal mode.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Samba==
 +
 
 +
Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax file system from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols
 +
 
 +
To map a network drive in windows :-
 +
 
 +
#Click Start, click My Network Places, click Entire Network, and then double-click Microsoft Windows Network.
 +
#Double-click the domain that you want to open.
 +
#Double-click the computer that has the shared resource you want to map. All the shared resources for that computer automatically appear in the window.
 +
#Right-click the shared drive or folder that you want to map, and then click Map Network Drive.
 +
#Click the drive letter that you want to use, and then specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer.
 +
#Note Network drives are mapped by using letters starting from the letter Z. This is the default drive letter for the first mapped drive you create. However, you can select another letter if you want to use a letter other than Z.
 +
 
 +
Drive sizes can be incorrectly reported, to avoid this set path = /media/My Video in the /mod/etc/smb.conf file
 +
 
 +
'''Tips'''
 +
 
 +
#Ensure Samba is enabled in Web-If >> Service Management
 +
#If the Windows 'WORKGROUP' has been changed from default, edit file /mod/etc/smb.conf to match the new name
 +
 
 +
==Schedchk==
 +
 +
Check scheduled recordings against EPG and reschedule, if possible, entries that don't match the EPG
 +
 
 +
See the [[Schedchk|user guide]] for further details
 +
 
 +
==Scons==
 +
 
 +
SCons is an Open Source software construction tool—that is, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic Make utility with integrated functionality similar to autoconf/automake and compiler caches such as ccache. In short, SCons is an easier, more reliable and faster way to build software
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Screensaver==
 +
 
 +
If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :-  /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plug-ins using the Web-If >> Settings screen
 +
 
 +
When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plug-in shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1"
 +
|-
 +
!3X5
 +
>>>
 +
|[[File:3X5.png|200px]]
 +
!Neon
 +
>>>
 +
|[[File:neon.png|200px]]
 +
!Avatar
 +
>>>
 +
|[[File:avatar.png|200px]] 
 +
|-
 +
! 7Seg
 +
>>>
 +
| [[File:7Seg.png|200px]]
 +
! Neon-Blue
 +
>>>
 +
| [[File:neon-blue.png|200px]]
 +
!Wedge
 +
>>>
 +
|[[File:Wedge.png|200px]]
 +
|-
 +
! Dot
 +
>>>
 +
| [[File:Dot.png|200px]]
 +
! Agen
 +
>>>
 +
| [[File:Agen.png|200px]]
 +
!Cursor
 +
>>>
 +
|[[File:Cursor.png|200px]]
 +
|-
 +
! VFD
 +
>>>
 +
| [[File:VFD.png|200px]]
 +
! Glass-Blue
 +
>>>
 +
| [[File:glass-b.png|200px]]
 +
!Maze
 +
>>>
 +
|[[File:Maze.png|200px]]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
'''screensaver-all''' = Install all current screensavers from the package server
 +
 
 +
''' screensaver-random''' = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers
 +
 
 +
Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plug-ins as follows e.g.:-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# screensaver
 +
  1: 3X5
 +
  2: 7Seg
 +
  3: Black
 +
  4: Cursor
 +
  5: Humax Default
 +
  6: Neon
 +
  7: Neon-Blue
 +
  8: VFD
 +
Choose option [1-8]:</pre>
 +
'''NOTES:-'''
 +
*The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
 +
*If screensaver-all is installed, it must be uninstalled before other screensaver plug-ins are uninstalled
 +
*If any of the screensaver Plug-ins are uninstalled the display will default to Humax Default
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Sed==
 +
 
 +
GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/manual/sed.html '''HERE'''] or  [http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Sed.html#uh-0 '''HERE''']
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Series Filer==
 +
 
 +
'''NOTE'''
 +
 
 +
'''The Series Filer package is no longer supported, the functions it carried out can be replicated by the [[sweeper | '''Sweeper''']] package, the following notes have been retained for reference only.'''
 +
 
 +
This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode
 +
 
 +
'''NOTE:-'''
 +
 
 +
The early versions of Series Filer were not compatible with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory was not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer versions before 0.2.2 with any version of the Undelete package, version 0.2.2 and above are safe to use
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Service Control==
 +
 
 +
A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> service </span>
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# service
 +
 
 +
Name                Installed  Autostart  Running
 +
----                ---------  ---------  -------
 +
mediatomb            No        No        No
 +
dropbear            No        No        No
 +
transmission        No        No        No
 +
samba                No        No        No
 +
cifs                No        No        No
 +
mongoose            Yes        Yes        Yes
 +
 
 +
Syntax:
 +
        service start <service>
 +
        service stop <service>
 +
        service auto <service>          (toggles autostart) </pre>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Sh (SHell)==
 +
 
 +
Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Sidecar==
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Sidecar Files
 +
 
 +
Recreates sidecar files .hmt and .nts from a .ts source file.
 +
 
 +
Command line options :-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
humax#sidecar
 +
 
 +
sidecar v2.5, a utility for the Humax HD/HDR Fox T2, by raydon (c) 2014-2018
 +
Usage: sidecar [-options] <recording name minus .ts extension>
 +
 
 +
        -n : Create new .nts file
 +
        -h : Create new or update existing .hmt file
 +
        -x : Exclude Prog/PMT ID's from .hmt file
 +
        -c : <Channel number for .hmt file>
 +
        -t : <Channel name for .hmt file>
 +
        -p : Display progress bar
 +
        -i : Display infomation
 +
 
 +
Enclose recording or channel name in quotes if they contain spaces or special characters e.g. &.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
humax#
 +
 
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
'''NOTES'''
 +
 
 +
#The Sidecar package must be installed using the Web-If >> Main screen >> Package Management >> Available screen
 +
#TS files must be decrypted before running Sidecar, If the TS is encrypted see note 5 below
 +
#Source video not native to the HDR/HD Fox T2, or that has been processed using some third party application may not be compatible
 +
#There are versions of sidecar complied for Linux and Windows platforms Here
 +
#if the ts file is encrypted, the package will create dummy hmt and nts files to allow the file to be decrypted i.e :-
 +
 
 +
*Use Sidecar to create the dummy hmt and nts files
 +
*Once indexed by the DLNA server, manually decrypt via 'Opt+' menu in Web-If
 +
*When the TS file is decrypted, simply run Sidecar again to create hmt and nts files providing full transport control.
 +
*There is no need to delete the dummy hmt or nts files since sidecar will detect these, and replace them with valid files
 +
*Sidecar can recreate valid hmt and nts file for both video and radio recordings
 +
 
 +
==Smartmontools==
 +
 
 +
This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T.  hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A </span>
 +
 
 +
or
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a </span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>for more details
 +
 
 +
Documentation [http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/smartmontools/wiki/TocDoc'''HERE''']
 +
<pre>
 +
 
 +
humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
 +
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
 +
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net
 +
 
 +
=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
 +
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
 +
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
 +
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME          FLAG    VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE      UPDATED  WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
 +
  1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate    0x000f  114  099  006    Pre-fail  Always      -      66811863
 +
  3 Spin_Up_Time            0x0003  097  097  000    Pre-fail  Always      -      0
 +
  4 Start_Stop_Count        0x0032  098  098  020    Old_age  Always      -      2878
 +
  5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct  0x0033  100  100  036    Pre-fail  Always      -      0
 +
  7 Seek_Error_Rate        0x000f  078  060  030    Pre-fail  Always      -      70502101
 +
  9 Power_On_Hours          0x0032  097  097  000    Old_age  Always      -      3294
 +
10 Spin_Retry_Count        0x0013  100  100  097    Pre-fail  Always      -      0
 +
12 Power_Cycle_Count      0x0032  099  099  020    Old_age  Always      -      1439
 +
184 End-to-End_Error        0x0032  100  100  099    Old_age  Always      -      0
 +
187 Reported_Uncorrect      0x0032  097  097  000    Old_age  Always      -      3
 +
188 Command_Timeout        0x0032  100  100  000    Old_age  Always      -      0
 +
189 High_Fly_Writes        0x003a  093  093  000    Old_age  Always      -      7
 +
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022  055  044  045    Old_age  Always  In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
 +
194 Temperature_Celsius    0x0022  045  056  000    Old_age  Always      -      45 (0 13 0 0)
 +
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered  0x001a  048  039  000    Old_age  Always      -      66811863
 +
197 Current_Pending_Sector  0x0012  100  100  000    Old_age  Always      -      0
 +
198 Offline_Uncorrectable  0x0010  100  100  000    Old_age  Offline      -      0
 +
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count    0x003e  200  200  000    Old_age  Always      -      0
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==SQLite3==
 +
 
 +
SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc. With readline support (arrow key editing and history)
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==SRT==
 +
 
 +
The Humax is able to play subtitles for MP4 and AVI files if the subtitle information is contained in an *.srt file, the following conditions must be met :-
 +
 
 +
*The srt file must have the same title as the video file e.g. Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.srt for Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.avi
 +
*The .srt file needs to be saved as a text file specifically with ANSI encoding to avoid using fonts that are licensed
 +
 
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
 
 +
1) Windows Notepad will produce a ANSI encoded srt file
 +
 
 +
2) Saving  the .srt file with UTF-7 encoding is reported to be more compatible with the Humax
 +
 
 +
3)A method for extracting SRT files from a Humax *.TS file has been documented on the Hummy.tv forum [http://hummy.tv/forum/threads/quick-guide-to-extract-dvb-subtitles-from-ts-hd-file-and-convert-to-srt-in-minutes.6625/  '''HERE''']
 +
 
 +
==SSMTP==
 +
 
 +
SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a  mail host or mail hub, It will not handle incoming E-Mail
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Status==
 +
 
 +
A Command line (Telnet) command that shows what the Humax is (and will be) doing, e.g. :-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# status
 +
Recording Pretty Woman_20121201_2310
 +
Watching 12: Dave - Would I Lie to You? (23:00 - 23:40) [7%]
 +
Will record 'The Omen' on Film4 at 23:15
 +
</pre>
 +
Note :- The same information is also displayed automatically on several Web-If screens e.g. The Main Screen and the Remote screen
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Strace==
 +
 
 +
Strace (System Trace) is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. It is used to monitor interactions between processes and the Linux kernel, which include system calls, signal deliveries, and changes of process state.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Stripts==
 +
This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
Humax TS Stripper Tool v1.4.2, by af123, 2012-18.
 +
 
 +
Syntax: stripts [options] <input> [output]
 +
    -a          Analyse an input file.
 +
    -A          Quickly analyse an input file.
 +
    -c          Check if there are any EIT packets.
 +
    -C          Show address of first EIT packet.
 +
    -D          Dump NTS file.
 +
    -E          Check if file is encrypted.
 +
    -f          Also fix PAT packets.
 +
    -F          Only fix PAT packets.
 +
    -T          Dump TS file.
 +
    -v          Verbose.
 +
    -X          Add bookmarks at programme start/end.
 +
    -Z          Extract EPG data from recording (incomplete).
 +
    -z          Analyse entire TS file.
 +
    -@ <key>    Decrypt recording with <key>.
 +
    -/ <key>    Check encryption key against recording. (* See NOTE Below)
 +
    -d [level]  Increase debug level or set debug level.
 +
 
 +
* NOTE :- This option has been reported to return "Incorrect" when using the correct key in the Windows version
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> stripts -F filename</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Fix file
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> stripts -f filename</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= remove redundant EIT packets
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> stripts -v filename</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Verbose
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> stripts -S filename</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= demux the raw audio stream into a file-name.audio file
 +
 
 +
'''NOTE'''
 +
Version 1.4.0 and above of strips also has a file decryption facility, this facility works on both Standard Definition and High Definition recordings and does not require Hi-Def recordings to have the 'ENC' flag removed with the Auto-Unprotect package, it does not require a DLNA URL to be allocated or the DLNA server to be running on the Humax, here is an example of a command line decryption using  Stripts :-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
stripts -@@ <input> <output>
 +
 
 +
stripts -@ 000378bd11f336333731303434393630 "input file name" "output file name"
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
1) In the first example above -@@ automatically inserts the resident Humax encryption key, (When the process is run on the original Humax recorder)
 +
 
 +
2) The Second example above is used when the decryption is being carried out on a different Humax unit (or on a computer), the original unit's encryption key must be entered, e.g :- for a MAC address of 00-03-78-bd-11-f3 and a serial number of 6371044960-1234, enter 000378bd11f3 followed by the first 10 digits of the serial number in hexidecimal e.g. 36333731303434393630 (adding a '3' before each digit from the serial number)
 +
 
 +
Here is a key compiled from the info. on the Humax label (Bottom panel) :-
 +
 
 +
[[File:Humax-Key.png|300px|thumb|left]]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
"input file name" and "output file name" are full *.ts file names, up to, but not including the .ts (Quotes are required for name with spaces)
 +
 
 +
There are versions of stripts that can perform offline decryption on various computer platforms including :- Linux, MacOSX and Windows etc., (NOTE :- The Windows version also requires cygwin1.dll) [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities  '''See Link HERE''']
 +
 
 +
==Swapper==
 +
 
 +
Swapper is a utility to change the Humax's swap file size to 128
 +
 
 +
==Sweeper==
 +
 
 +
Sweeper is a package which re-locates recordings under My Video and files them away automatically for you according to specified criteria, Sweeper can also replicate the Series Filer and flatten packages
 +
 
 +
There is a comprehensive guide to the Sweeper Graphical User Interface [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
'''Command Line operation'''
 +
 
 +
Sweeper rules can also be generated manually by editting the /mod/etc/sweeper.conf file, available from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File editor
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Example 1)
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> action {move "archive/miscellaneous"}</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Move all single files into a folder called  archive/miscellaneous (which must exist)
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> action {movecreate "archive/miscellaneous"}</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Move all single files into a folder called  archive/miscellaneous (folder will be created)
 +
 
 +
Example 2)
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Move single files from channels 70 - 79 to Children/Miscellaneous folder
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> action {move _misc}</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Move all remaining single files into a folder called  _misc
 +
 
 +
Example 3)
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> action {movecreate(Test-%genre-%definition-%title-%channel-%lcn-%duration-%timestamp)}</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Expanded to Test-Entertainment-SD-Tim Minchin and the Heritage...-Channel 4-4-87-20130824233802]
 +
 
 +
Example 4)
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= Move the contents of a series created folder to an existing sub folder e.g. from /Octonauts to /Children/Octonauts/Series 3
 +
 
 +
Example 5)
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> folder action {fileunder ""}</span> <span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HI </span>= emulates the old seriesfiler package
 +
 
 +
Example 6)
 +
 
 +
Notes :-
 +
*lines starting with '#' are comments
 +
*A full list of commands are detailed in the Sweeper Guide [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
# Sweep single Big Bang episodes into the series folder
 +
lcn 4 title "Big Bang" action {move "The Big Bang Theory"}
 +
# Move anything recorded from a children's channel to the Miscellaneous folder
 +
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} duration {>= 90} lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
 +
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} genre Film lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
 +
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}
 +
folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}
 +
folder lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {fileundercreate Children}
 +
title {Formula 1} action {move F1}
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Subtitles==
 +
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#SRT | '''See SRT''']]
 +
 
 +
==Swifi==
 +
 
 +
A utility that can retrieve and display your current Wi-fi configuration, it's location is :- /sbin/swifi
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Sysmon==
 +
[[File:HDD-Temp.png|right|150px]]
 +
[[File:CPU.png|right|150px]]
 +
[[File:network.png|right|150px]]
 +
A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-
 +
 
 +
*Hard Disk Temperature
 +
 
 +
Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Smartmontools | '''Smartmontools''']]
 +
package, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days. All graphs have a zoom feature which is implemented with a mouse 'click / drag' or a touchscreen 'pinch / expand'
 +
 
 +
*CPU Utilisation
 +
 
 +
Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days
 +
 
 +
*Network Utilisation
 +
 
 +
Displays a graph showing Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days
 +
 
 +
 
 +
The data used to build the graphs is held in file /mod/monitor/monitor.db, currently the tables include :-
 +
#SMART = Hard disk sector relocation information (Not currently displayed as a graph)
 +
#Temp = the Hard Disk Temperature information
 +
#Vmstat = CPU Utilisation data for Idle, Wait, User, System
 +
#Net = Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors
 +
#State = state (Not currently displayed as a graph)
 +
 
 +
'''Note''' You can reset the database with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> sysmon/purge >> Run Diagnostic
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==System Flush==
 +
 
 +
The System Flush Update File is a package that is installed in the same way as a firmware update to perform a full system flush and reset, it reformats the areas of flash used for persistent data like the schedule, there are two of these flash areas and they use the JFFS2 filesystem.
 +
 
 +
The package is designed to assist recovery from crash/reboot loops.Your recordings will not be affected.'NB: This will also clear most CFW package settings.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==TCL Check==
 +
 
 +
Utilities for syntax checking TCL (or Jim) files
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Tcpfix==
 +
 
 +
This package Modifys the TCP stack to fix download problems that appears to be related to RFC1323 TCP window scaling in the Linux 2.6.18 kernel that the Humax uses
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==TCP Ping==
 +
 
 +
Simple TCP ping utility.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Telnet==
 +
 
 +
Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html '''PuTTY'''], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will  see the humax# prompt.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet
 +
 
 +
See '''<span style="color:#FF0000"> RED </span>''' set-up notes below, to prevent errors when entering text
 +
 
 +
Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet
 +
 
 +
Follow [[Telnet |'''THIS LINK''']] for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection
 +
 
 +
Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for <span style="background:#FFFF00"> ls -al </span>
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
C:\> telnet
 +
 
 +
Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client  Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'
 +
 
 +
open 10.0.0.200
 +
 
 +
humax# ls -al
 +
total 17
 +
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root  192 Jan 10 09:10 .
 +
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root  192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
 +
drwxr-xr-x  2 root root  474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
 +
.......
 +
drwxr-xr-x  4 root root  88 Jan 10 09:10 var
 +
humax#
 +
 
 +
to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d
 +
 
 +
Microsoft Telnet >
 +
to exit from Telnet enter q
 +
C:\>
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
NOTES
 +
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a <span style="background:#FFFF00"> Yellow Background </span>
 +
*'''<span style="color:#FF0000"> [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' </span>'''
 +
*'''<span style="color:#FF0000"> [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf </span>'''
 +
*The Humax has a Built-In Telnet Welcome Screen, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tmenu | '''Tmenu''']] for details
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Telnet Commands==
 +
 
 +
The majority of Unix / Linux command line keywords can be used on the Humax, if you are not familiar with them, there are a few of the more basic commands and their meanings here :-
 +
*<span style="background:#FFFF00"> cd </span> = change directory, used to navigate around the file structure
 +
*<span style="background:#FFFF00"> cd "/media/My Video"  </span> = navigate to the top level of My Video
 +
*<span style="background:#FFFF00"> pwd </span> = print working directory, tells you where you are in the file structure
 +
*<span style="background:#FFFF00"> ls -al </span> = list contents of the current directory
 +
*<span style="background:#FFFF00"> touch  "/media/My Video/dummy.ts" </span> = create an empty file called dummy.ts in the My Video directory
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Tempmon==
 +
 
 +
This package checks the HDD temperature every three minutes and will raise a warning if a configurable thresholds is exceeded, the warning is displayed on the HDR-Fox T2's front panel and the centre 'button' flashes. The Setting >> Tempmon page shows the current Hard Disk temperature and has defaults as follows :- Alert If = 50, Attempt to go into standby if = 60 and Immediate power off If = 70 Deg C
 +
 
 +
'''Note''' If the Fan package is not installed the normal Humax routine will turn the fan on at 56 Deg C, so it is suggested that 'Alert If' should be set to 60 Deg C and the other two parameters are set to 65 and 70 Deg C
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Text Editors==
 +
 
 +
There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#File Editor |'''HERE''']]). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vi |'''Vi''']] built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware).  There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Basic |'''Vim Basic''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Standard | '''Vim Standard''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Joe | '''Joe''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nano | '''Nano''']].
 +
 
 +
If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's
 +
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sed | '''sed''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Tmenu==
 +
 
 +
This built-in package adds a menu to the Telnet Login screen Menu
 +
 
 +
Enter 0000 for system PIN. Note:- this is the default
 +
<pre>
 +
Menu Version 1.13
 +
Enter System PIN :
 +
 
 +
      /-------------------------\
 +
      |  T E L N E T  M E N U  |
 +
      \-------------------------/
 +
 
 +
  [ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03 ] or [Humax HD-Fox T2 (humaxhd) 1.02.29/2.15]
 +
 
 +
    1 - Restart into maintenance mode.
 +
    2 - Remove web interface password.
 +
stat - Show what the box is currently doing.
 +
    x - Exit and close connection.
 +
rset - Reset custom firmware environment.
 +
srma - Set return-to-manufacturer (RMA) mode.
 +
diag - Run a diagnostic.
 +
  cli - System command line (advanced users).
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Please select option:
 +
 
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
NOTE :- It is possible to skip the above Menu and go directly to the Command Line Interface by selecting Expert mode telnet server = On in the Web-If >> Settings >> Advanced Settings
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Tnftp==
 +
 
 +
The Humax HDR has a built-in FTP Server for transfer of files from Humax to a remote client and an improved FTP Server called [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd|'''Betaftpd''']] to replace it in the HDR, and to add it to the HD, the Tnftp package provides an FTP Client for file transfer from a remote FTP server to the Humax
 +
 
 +
tnftp is a port of the NetBSD FTP client.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==
 +
 
 +
The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.
 +
 
 +
Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from
 +
 
 +
For command line access enter :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> transmission-remote </span>
 +
 
 +
/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. [https://trac.transmissionbt.com/wiki/EditConfigFiles '''HERE''']
 +
 
 +
 
 +
*Go into service control and start Transmission
 +
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
 +
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
 +
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
 +
*Select browse in the window and highlight the previously downloaded *.torrent file
 +
*When highlighted select 'Open'
 +
*Select 'Upload'
 +
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
 +
* A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads
 +
 
 +
===Blocklist===
 +
 
 +
The torrent system is a 'two-way' process which can allow other users to access your downloaded files, this access can cause a security risk and it is suggested that a block list is set up to prevent this, the Block list contains a set of IP address's not allowed access.
 +
 
 +
To create or add to a blocklist go to Transmission >> Preferences (Bottom left 'Spanner') >> Peers >> Blocklist and Enable Blocklist, then go to a block list site such as http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php and copy an Update URL e.g. http://list.iblocklist.com/?list=bt_level1&fileformat=p2p&archiveformat=gz from there to the Block list URL box and click on Update, This process can be repeated to build up bigger lists
 +
 
 +
It is also possible to place *.txt files containing blocklists into the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be  created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules
 +
 
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
*When the block lists are initially being converted into *.bin files, transmission uses an excessive amount of CPU time, this could cause errors in recording, so it is suggested that this is done when the Humax is idle.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Transportx==
 +
 
 +
This package provides some additional functionality to the 'transport' controls.
 +
A reboot will be required after installation.
 +
 
 +
When this package is installed the following changes are made to the transport controls:
 +
 
 +
The first press of the pause button will pause as before but subsequent presses will each advance by one frame. Use the play button to resume normal playback.​
 +
 +
After the slow (trick mode) button is pressed, slow mode is activated, the Rewind and FFwd buttons will then slow it down or speed it up respectively. To change direction first pause and then select a direction using Rewind/FFwd (it will then start moving at the slowest speed). Repeated presses of these buttons will speed up/slow down still further. Press Play to resume normal operation.​
 +
 
 +
*Slow button: x1/2 fwd​
 +
*Rew button: x1/4 fwd​
 +
*Rew button: x1/8 fwd​
 +
*Rew button: x1/16 fwd​ [Further presses of the rewind button will not change the speed or direction]​
 +
*Pause button: pause​
 +
*Rew button: x1/16 rew​
 +
*Rew button: x1/4 rew​
 +
*Rew button: x1 rew​
 +
 +
If the FFwd button is pressed instead then the above sequence is reversed.​
 +
 
 +
Known bugs:
 +
 
 +
When playing a remote recording via a dlna network connecton, a frame advance occurs only on alternate presses of the pause button.​
 +
The onscreen display of speed/direction will be incorrect when using the slow modes - this is very unlikely to be fixable.​
 +
Slow reverse tends to skip frames when viewing HiDef content and some low bandwidth StdDef content. This may be due to hardware limitations
 +
 
 +
==Trm==
 +
 
 +
Trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==TSTools==
 +
 
 +
A set of tools for manipulating TS files, they include :-
 +
[[File:Tstools.jpg|left|400px]]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==TTYSnoop==
 +
 
 +
TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Tunefix==
 +
[[File:tunefix.png|right]]
 +
Tunefix restores a user's settings after a retune has been run, the 5 Keywords are :-
 +
 
 +
*'''REGION''' to be used (channels from other regions will be removed)
 +
*'''LCN''' (s) by number and/or range will be removed
 +
*'''NAME''' services by name will be removed
 +
*'''MUX''' (s) (all channels from these MUXs will be removed)
 +
*'''FORCE''' named services to the correct LCN
 +
 
 +
'''Note''' Multiple Regions, LCNs, MUXs are separated by commas
 +
 
 +
==Tunefix Update==
 +
 
 +
Automatic channel deletion and fixing after a retune.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==TV Diary==
 +
 
 +
tvdiary is an add-on to the web interface. It tracks the TV programs you record and watch, and presents a diary view through the web interface, See Full Guide[[ TV_Diary | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Uinput==
 +
 
 +
User-space input kernel module
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Unencrypt==
 +
 
 +
New Note:- This package is no longer supported, with the addition to the Web-If of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Auto-Dedup|'''auto-decrypt''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Recursive_Auto-Decrypt|'''recursive auto-decrypt''']] these new functions are recommended in place of Unencrypt due to them being more robust and having more sanity checks
 +
 
 +
The function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are decrypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results
 +
 
 +
To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet|'''Telnet''']] enter one of the lines below :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>process a single directory
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> unencryptsetup </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>process all files in 'My Video'
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> unencryptsetup disable</span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>Turn off unencrypt
 +
 
 +
This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.
 +
 
 +
NOTES:-
 +
*<span style="color:#ff0000"> '''Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer''' </span>
 +
 
 +
*It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
 +
<pre>
 +
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
*Auto-Unprotect must be running
 +
*[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings
 +
 
 +
See Decryption flow chart [[Encryption | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
==Undelete==
 +
 
 +
Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
 +
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)
 +
 
 +
Settings can be changed in :- Web-If >> Settings >> Undelete Settings, e.g. :-
 +
 
 +
*Dustbin Name
 +
*Remove files from dustbin after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 days
 +
*Reduce retention time to 0 days if disk space < 10GiB (configurable)
 +
 
 +
A Log records delete activity at /mod/tmp/empty_dustbin.log
 +
 
 +
Setting are contained in /mod/webif/plugin/undelete/user.conf
 +
 
 +
==Version==
 +
 
 +
Command line (Via Telnet) utility to display various Web-If version numbers, e.g. :-
 +
<pre>
 +
humax# version
 +
 
 +
Humax HDR Fox T2 (humax)
 +
  Humax Version: 1.03.12 (kernel HDR_CFW_3.00)
 +
  Custom firmware version: 3.00 (build 2137)
 +
  Web interface version: 1.2.1
 +
  Serial Number: 12 3456789 12345
 +
 
 +
humax#
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Vfdtest==
 +
[[File:front-icons2.png|right|200px]]
 +
 
 +
This utility turns on all segments of the Humax front display (Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
 +
 
 +
Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Run Diagnostic >> vfdtest (available in pull down menu). This will force the display to set all segments to 'on' for 30 seconds, followed by all segments off
 +
 
 +
'''NOTE:- ''' normal display will return after the Humax is placed in standby
 +
 
 +
Command Line Version :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> vfdtest on </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>Set Display to All segments On
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00"> vfdtest off </span><span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>Set Display to All Segments off
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Vi==
 +
 
 +
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']]  package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Vim Basic==
 +
 
 +
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Vim Standard==
 +
 
 +
Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Virtual-Disk==
 +
 
 +
One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
 +
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
 +
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
 +
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared. Any copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place
 +
 
 +
'''Note:- For new installations, Virtual-Disk2 is now recommended in place of this package'''
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Virtual-Disk2==
 +
 
 +
The original Virtual-Disk package (See Above) required a physical USB drive to be in place before the virtual drive could be seen, this new version removes this requirement by creating a drive called 'Virtual-USB', as with a 'real' USB drive, you will get an on-screen display each time the system is started, giving USB options 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Web IF ==
 +
 
 +
[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']]<span style="color:#FFFFFF"> HIDE </span>[[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]
 +
 
 +
An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
 +
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
 +
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser
 +
 
 +
Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-
 +
 
 +
===Backup/Restore Schedule===
 +
[[File:Backup.png|70px|thumb|right]]
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events
 +
 
 +
This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the backup folder e.g.  /mod/var/backup/auto-2013-Feb-22-18:06.rbk
 +
 
 +
NOTE : An auto-schedule-restore backup, is a seperate file held in /mod/boot/schedule.ab
 +
 
 +
===Change Channel===
 +
 
 +
Web-If >> EPG >> Grid Style or Now and Next >> Click on a Channel Logo icon
 +
 
 +
A Change Channel? question box will pop-up, if you click on 'Yes' the Humax will change the 'Live' tuned channel to the selected channel
 +
 
 +
Note :- This option requires that the ir Custom Firmware package is installed
 +
 
 +
===Change Folder===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Series Recording) >> Change Folder
 +
 
 +
Allows the name of a Series Recording folder to be changed, not valid on a single recording
 +
 
 +
===Cleanup Old Recording (Schedules)===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Cleanup Old Recordings (at the bottom of the screen)
 +
 
 +
Allows all entries in the schedule that have no Start Time to be deleted, Humax normally auto-deletes these entries after 12 Weeks.
 +
 
 +
'''Note:-''' As the EPG is only 7/8 days long caution should be used when deleting scheduled entries that are transmitted less frequently e.g. fortnightly
 +
 
 +
===Clipboard===
 +
 
 +
Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard
 +
 
 +
===Create Folder===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> More >> Create Folder
 +
 
 +
Create a new folder destination for future recordings, See also [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Change_Folder | ''' Change Folder]] where you can change the default folder name
 +
 
 +
===Copy===
 +
 
 +
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]
 +
 
 +
===Crop===
 +
[[File:crop.png|200px|thumb|right]]
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop
 +
 
 +
See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
===Cut===
 +
 
 +
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]
 +
 
 +
===Delete===
 +
 
 +
Remove file, folder, item from a recording schedule etc., depending on where the option is encountered
 +
 
 +
===Decrypt===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt
 +
 
 +
This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTES:-
 +
* both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
 +
* Decrypt requires [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] to be turned on
 +
 
 +
===De-duplicate / Tidy this folder===
 +
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
 +
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder
 +
 
 +
This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also separate duplicates into a new folder
 +
 
 +
See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>
 +
 
 +
This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles
 +
 
 +
It will Also separate duplicates into a new folder
 +
 
 +
See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>
 +
 
 +
===Detect Adverts===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Detect Adverts
 +
 
 +
Add bookmarks to a recording where adverts are detected, so that they can be cropped
 +
 
 +
===Disable AR===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Recording) >> Disable AR
 +
 
 +
Allows the default [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] feature to be replaced with Padding on a 'per-recording' basis, in a further drop down menu start and stop padding times can be entered
 +
 
 +
===Download===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download
 +
 
 +
This function will download with decryption an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-
 +
 
 +
# The File type *.TS must not be associated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
 +
# Your browser must allow re-direction of addresses
 +
 
 +
===Enable Auto-Audio===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Audio
 +
 
 +
Automatically extract an MP3 audio file from all recordings placed in this folder
 +
 
 +
===Enable Auto-Dedup===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup
 +
 
 +
Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Dedup_.28Command_Line.29 |'''Dedup''']])
 +
 
 +
===Enable Auto-Decrypt===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt
 +
 
 +
Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Decrypt |'''Decrypt''']])
 +
 
 +
===Enable Auto Expire===
 +
[[File:autoexp.png|200px|thumb|right]]
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Expire
 +
 
 +
Automatically delete files in a selected folder a pre-set number of days after recording e.g.1 to 999 days or when above a total number of recordings, Note :- If the Undelete package is installed, the files will be placed in the [Deleted folder] first
 +
 
 +
 
 +
===Bookmarks===
 +
[[File:bookmarks.png|right|150px]]
 +
Add, remove and edit bookmarks manually
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Bookmarks
 +
 
 +
===Enable Auto-MPG===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-MPG
 +
 
 +
Automatically extract MPG copys of the *.TS files in the same folder, the MPG versions strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-
 +
 
 +
*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
 +
*ffmpeg package must be installed
 +
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
 +
===Enable Auto-Shrink===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink
 +
 
 +
Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Shrink_.28stripts.29 |'''Shrink''']])
 +
 
 +
===Enable Recursive Auto-Shrink===
 +
 
 +
As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder
 +
 
 +
===Enable Recursive Auto-Decrypt===
 +
 
 +
As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder
 +
 
 +
===Enable Recursive Auto-Dedup (command line)===
 +
 
 +
NOTE :- This is not available from the Web-If as it may not be a good idea. Not all series are amenable to auto-dedup and if the broadcaster uses the same programme title for each episode then all but one will be flagged as duplicates.
 +
 
 +
However, if you wish, you can enable this option from the command line by creating an .autodedupr file, e.g.
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00">touch "/mod/My Video/Kids/.autodedupr" </span>
 +
 
 +
===Extract Audio===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio
 +
 
 +
This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard  Def.  Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-
 +
 
 +
*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
 +
*ffmpeg package must be installed
 +
*Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
 +
*The extracted MP3 file is in a format sometimes called MPEG-2 Audio, not the more common Layer 3 audio, although some MP3 players will accept this format, a greater number of MP3 players require the layer 3 format, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out on the Humax due to amount of CPU usage required
 +
 
 +
===Extract To MPG===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG
 +
 
 +
This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-
 +
 
 +
*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
 +
*ffmpeg package must be installed
 +
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
 +
*The equivalent command line would be:-
 +
<pre>
 +
ffmpeg -y -benchmark -v 0 -i <ts file> -map 0:0 -map 0:1 -vcodec copy -acodec copy <mpg file>
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
===Enable Auto-mpg===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Folder) >> OPT+ >> Enable Auto-mpg
 +
 
 +
As above but working on every file in a selected folder
 +
 
 +
===File Editor===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to desired file]
 +
 
 +
===Lock===
 +
 
 +
Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion
 +
 
 +
===Mark as Watched===
 +
 
 +
Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol
 +
 
 +
===Manual Event===
 +
[[File:manual-event.png|thumb|right]]
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Manual Event
 +
 
 +
Allows the set up of a manual recording or reminder, options include:-
 +
*Create : One-off, Daily, weekly,Weekday, Weekend
 +
*Create : Recording or Reminder
 +
*From : Date/Time to: Date/Time
 +
*Channel : Number / Name
 +
*Event Title : Defaults to Channel Name
 +
 
 +
===Multi Mode Recording===
 +
 
 +
This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Accurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See [[Multi-mode_Recording|'''Guide Here''']]
 +
 
 +
===Network Settings===
 +
[[File:network-settings.png|thumb]]
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Settings >> Network Settings
 +
 
 +
This option provides a Web-If alternative to entering Ethernet Interface and Wireless Interface parameters into the standard Humax Settings screen. The Web-If Wireless Interface screen has several advantages over the standard Humax one e.g :-
 +
*Allows a wider range of ascii characters e.g. "%#<>" to be entered for passwordphrases
 +
*Overcomes time restrictions when entering long passphrases / Keys
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
*Web-If 1.2.0-3 or later must be running
 +
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected, run /sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']]
 +
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected and Wireless Helper is installed run /mod/sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']] to shutdown the Ethernet interface when bringing up the wireless interface
 +
 
 +
===New Folder===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> New Folder
 +
 
 +
Creates a new empty folder, into which recorded files can be moved
 +
 
 +
===Paste===
 +
 
 +
See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]
 +
 
 +
[[File:Webif-media-detail.png|100px|thumb|right]]
 +
 
 +
===Play===
 +
 
 +
This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plug-in installed for your browser
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Click on Single File) >> Play
 +
 
 +
===Rename (File)===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Click on Single File) >> Rename
 +
 
 +
Enables the following fields to be changed / added to a single file :-
 +
 
 +
*New Filename
 +
*New Medialist Title
 +
*New Synopsis
 +
*New Guidance Text
 +
*New Genre
 +
 
 +
===Rename (Folder)===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Rename
 +
 
 +
Enables a folder to be re-named
 +
 
 +
===Reset New Flag===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Reset New Flag
 +
 
 +
Mark a Folder as containing new material
 +
 
 +
===Save Last Streamed Content===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Save Last Streamed Content
 +
 
 +
This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-
 +
 
 +
<span style="background:#FFFF00">cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" </span>
 +
 
 +
NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed
 +
 
 +
===Set Thumbnail===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Set Thumbnail
 +
 
 +
Change the current on-screen Thumbnail picture for one of 5 pictures covering a 2.5 Second time frame, the centre frame time can be offset from  0 - 99999 seconds, there is also a -30, -5, +5 and +30 second 'nudge' that can be added to the offset.
 +
 
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
* The Set Thumbnail option will be greyed out if the file is not decrypted first
 +
* High Definition files have 3 pictures covering a 1.5 Second time frame
 +
* Thumbnails may take some time to generate on Hi-Def Files
 +
* If a bookmark is present the thumbnail selections will centre on it
 +
 +
===Sidecar Files===
 +
 
 +
see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sidecar | '''Sidecar''']]
 +
 
 +
===Split===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)
 +
 
 +
This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.
 +
 
 +
The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial
 +
 
 +
===Shrink (stripts)===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink
 +
 
 +
Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording
 +
 
 +
===Sweeper Rules===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Sweeper Rules
 +
 
 +
View / Edit the Sweeper Rules for this folder. Note this option will only be displayed if the sweeper package is installer
 +
 
 +
===Toggle no-sweep flag===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Toggle no-sweep flag
 +
 
 +
Disable / enable the sweeper rule generated for this folder
 +
 
 +
===View Thumbnail===
 +
 
 +
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> View Thumbnail
 +
 
 +
View current on-screen Thumbnail picture
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Web-IF Channel Icons==
 +
 
 +
A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Webif-Charts==
 +
 
 +
Chart modules for the web interface
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Webif-iphone==
 +
 
 +
A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices
 +
 
 +
See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Webif Style Sheet==
 +
 
 +
The web interface allow you to set your own style overrides in a style sheet file called EXTRA.css, it is located at /mod/webif/html/css/EXTRA.css and is selectable from the Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor drop down menu. Lines added to this file can change some aspects of how the Web Interface is presented to the user e.g. the following lines will prevent genre, guidance (all occurrences) or channel icons being displayed :-
 +
<pre>
 +
img.genre { display: none; }
 +
img[src^="/img/Guidance"] { display: none; }
 +
img.browsechannel { display: none; }
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Change the size of the pie chart:-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
#tbdiskpie
 +
{
 +
  width: 100px;
 +
  height: 100px;
 +
}
 +
 
 +
.tbdiskpie
 +
{
 +
  top: 7px !important;
 +
}
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
Add Borders to Web-If Pages :-
 +
<pre>
 +
table.schedule { border-spacing: 2px; }
 +
table.schedule tr > * { border: 1px solid; }
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
Change font colour or size :-
 +
<pre>
 +
table.schedule td * { color: black; }
 +
table.schedule td { font-size: 1.1em; }
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
Change Icon size
 +
<pre>
 +
img.button { height: 50px; }
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
Remove EPG 'Go to Top' arrow :-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
#toTop, #toTopHover
 +
{
 +
  background: transparent !important;
 +
  display: none !important;
 +
  opacity: 100 !important;
 +
}
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
Remove EPG ENC icons
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
img.epgenc { display: none; }
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
==Webshell==
 +
 
 +
After installing this package, an extra icon will be added to the Main Menu >> Diagnostics page at the bottom right, after a re-boot, this will allow access to a Humax Command line similar to using Telnet access
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==webm==
 +
 
 +
This is an audiovisual media file format, if you download files in this format from YouTube (See Youtube-dl), the video and audio may be separated into two files, It is possible to merge these files using  ffmpeg, if you download  the *.webm video only file and rename it in_vid.webm and download the *.m4a file and rename it in_aud.m4a then the following ffmpeg command line will merge them for you :-
 +
<pre>
 +
ffmpeg -i in_aud.m4a -i in_vid.webm -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==wget==
 +
 
 +
Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP
 +
 
 +
'''Notes:-'''
 +
*There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version
 +
*Both the Busybox and the current stand alone versions of wget (1.12) may fail on websites that demand newer versions of TLS/SSL than the ones supported
 +
 
 +
When attempting to download a Custom Firmware package specifying a version number, an error will be produced unless the -U option is used, eg :-
 +
<pre>
 +
wget -U "" http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/at_3.1.18_mipsel.opk
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
The use of "opkg download" with a specifed version number will also fail
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Wireless Helper==
 +
 
 +
Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==WOL==
 +
 
 +
Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.
 +
<pre>
 +
ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05
 +
</pre>
 +
To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-
 +
<pre>
 +
echo  /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
 +
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
 +
</pre>
 +
NOTES:-
 +
*WOL is also built into [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Network_Shares_Automount|'''Network_Shares_Automount''']]
 +
*The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Xtra1 Portal==
 +
 
 +
See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal| '''HERE''']]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==Youtube-dl==
 +
 
 +
This pacakage uses a command line to download videos from Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV Hub etc., in the following example, a 4K test video is downloaded from YouTube :-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
Humax2# youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
The above downloads a 720 line version of the file which is pretty useless when testing 2176 lines, however it is possible to list all available video formats using the -F option :-
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
Humax2# youtube -F https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
 +
 
 +
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
 +
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
 +
[info] Available formats for SlLFOrWvY_M:
 +
format code  extension  resolution note
 +
249          webm      audio only DASH audio    3k , opus @ 50k, 26.87KiB
 +
250          webm      audio only DASH audio    3k , opus @ 70k, 26.87KiB
 +
251          webm      audio only DASH audio    3k , opus @160k, 26.87KiB
 +
171          webm      audio only DASH audio    6k , vorbis@128k, 22.21KiB
 +
140          m4a        audio only DASH audio  145k , m4a_dash container, mp4a.40.2@128k, 932.03KiB
 +
278          webm      256x144    144p  34k , webm container, vp9, 13fps, video only, 184.31KiB
 +
242          webm      426x240    240p  44k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 248.03KiB
 +
160          mp4        256x144    144p  50k , avc1.42c00c, 13fps, video only, 257.52KiB
 +
134          mp4        640x360    360p  74k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 417.64KiB
 +
243          webm      640x360    360p  78k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 433.50KiB
 +
133          mp4        426x240    240p  87k , avc1.4d4015, 25fps, video only, 480.96KiB
 +
244          webm      854x480    480p  116k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 633.67KiB
 +
135          mp4        854x480    480p  117k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 656.08KiB
 +
136          mp4        1280x720  720p  191k , avc1.4d401f, 25fps, video only, 1.04MiB
 +
247          webm      1280x720  720p  203k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.08MiB
 +
137          mp4        1920x1080  1080p  312k , avc1.640028, 25fps, video only, 1.71MiB
 +
248          webm      1920x1080  1080p  357k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.89MiB
 +
271          webm      2560x1440  1440p  609k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 3.20MiB
 +
313          webm      3840x2160  2160p 1122k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 5.88MiB
 +
17          3gp        176x144    small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2@ 24k, 272.97KiB
 +
36          3gp        320x180    small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2, 1004.79KiB
 +
43          webm      640x360    medium , vp8.0, vorbis@128k, 589.88KiB
 +
18          mp4        640x360    medium , avc1.42001E, mp4a.40.2@ 96k, 1.61MiB
 +
22          mp4        1280x720  hd720 , avc1.64001F, mp4a.40.2@192k (best)
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
you can then select the required version of the video with the -f option
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
Humax2# youtube -f "313" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
 +
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
 +
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
 +
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm
 +
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
NOTE:-  the required download file is named *.webm  this file won't be visible from the remote control  OPT+ copy/move lisings, but is visible via Telnet / FTP etc., you can rename the file to something like 4K-test.mp4 before viewing directly on your 4K TV (not via the HD only Humax)
 +
 
 +
To combine video only and audio only files into a single file use the following option (Video MUST be the first item, e.g. 313)
 +
 
 +
<pre>
 +
Humax2# youtube -f "313+171"  https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
 +
 
 +
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
 +
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
 +
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm
 +
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
 +
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm
 +
[download] 100% of 22.21KiB in 00:00
 +
[ffmpeg] Merging formats into "/mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm"
 +
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm (pass -k to keep)
 +
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm (pass -k to keep)
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
Youtube-dl has a config file at :- /mod/etc/youtube-dl.conf
 +
 
 +
Full reference notes are here :-
 +
 
 +
[https://github.com/rg3/youtube-dl/blob/master/README.md#readme  '''Github Notes''']
 +
 
 +
A list of websites claimed to be working for the Windows version of Youtube-DL is here :-
 +
 
 +
[https://rg3.github.io/youtube-dl/supportedsites.html '''Available Sites''']
 +
 
 +
'''Mainsteam sites Working on the Humax Version'''
 +
 
 +
Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV-Hub, STV, dplay
 +
 
 +
'''Mainstream sites Not Working on the Humax Version'''
 +
 
 +
Channel4, My5, UKTVPlay
 +
 
 +
==Zeroconf==
  
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)
+
mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS
  
This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.
+
After installation the zeroconf package will participate in mDNS-like traffic so you can access the box by name from most operating systems. On some, like Apple and Linux, you would access it as humax.local (assuming humax is the hostname) and on others, like Windows, you can just use humax. Windows can also pick up the name to IP address mapping if you have Samba installed and running.
  
The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial
 
  
 +
==Zip==
  
===Shrink (stripts)===
+
zip utilities for compressing files :-
 
+
<pre>
 
+
Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink
 
 
 
Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording.
 
 
 
 
 
==Web-IF Channel Icons==
 
 
 
A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels
 
 
 
 
 
==Webif-Charts==
 
 
 
Chart modules for the web interface
 
 
 
 
 
==Webif-iphone==
 
 
 
A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices
 
 
 
See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]
 
 
 
 
 
==wget==
 
 
 
Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP
 
 
 
Note:- There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version
 
 
 
 
 
==Wireless Helper==
 
 
 
Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle
 
 
 
 
 
==WOL==
 
  
Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.
+
humax# zip
<pre>
+
Copyright (c) 1990-2008 Info-ZIP - Type 'zip "-L"' for software license.
ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05
+
Zip 3.0 (July 5th 2008). Usage:
</pre>
+
zip [-options] [-b path] [-t mmddyyyy] [-n suffixes] [zipfile list] [-xi list]
To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-
+
  The default action is to add or replace zipfile entries from list, which
<pre>
+
  can include the special name - to compress standard input.
echo  /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
+
  If zipfile and list are omitted, zip compresses stdin to stdout.
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
+
  -f  freshen: only changed files  -u  update: only changed or new files
 +
  -d  delete entries in zipfile    -m  move into zipfile (delete OS files)
 +
  -r  recurse into directories    -j  junk (don't record) directory names
 +
  -0  store only                  -l  convert LF to CR LF (-ll CR LF to LF)
 +
  -1  compress faster              -9  compress better
 +
  -q  quiet operation              -v  verbose operation/print version info
 +
  -c  add one-line comments        -z  add zipfile comment
 +
  -@  read names from stdin        -o  make zipfile as old as latest entry
 +
  -x  exclude the following names  -i  include only the following names
 +
  -F  fix zipfile (-FF try harder) -D  do not add directory entries
 +
  -A  adjust self-extracting exe  -J  junk zipfile prefix (unzipsfx)
 +
  -T  test zipfile integrity      -X  eXclude eXtra file attributes
 +
  -y  store symbolic links as the link instead of the referenced file
 +
  -e  encrypt                      -n  don't compress these suffixes
 
</pre>
 
</pre>
NOTES:-
 
*WOL is also built into [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Network_Shares_Automount|'''Network_Shares_Automount''']]
 
*The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by
 
 
 
==Xtra1 Portal==
 
 
See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]
 
 
 
==Zeroconf==
 
 
mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS
 

Latest revision as of 14:58, 26 March 2023

BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES

Note Note: Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require any additional packages to be installed. These features are covered in the Web If section of this page.

Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect.

Also, see Forum Links HERE

Contents

7Zip

Command line utility that can pack and unpack zip type files

  • Supported Packing / unpacking formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
  • Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.


Android-Remote

H-rem1.png
H-rem2.png

This is a remote-control app for the Humax HDR Fox-T2 digital video recorder and also the Foxsat, requirements are :-

Version 2 of this App. adds provision for multiple Humaxs, the option for 1 or 2 screens depending on screen size and the Foxsat

The Android App. is available Click Here

Arbookmarks

Adds bookmarks into automatically or manually padded recordings, bookmarks are placed at Accurate Recording start and stop points to all files in folders marked as Auto Decrypt, the following conditions must be met before the Bookmarks will be added :-

  • The Arbookmarks package must be installed
  • Files must be in a folder that is marked for auto-decryption (open lock icon present)
  • Files must be DLNA indexed (automatically done by the Humax periodically, lime green circular icon present)
  • Files must not be recorded using AR i.e. the AR flags are not at start and end of file
  • AR flags must be present i.e. recordings made in the middle of a programme won't contain AR flags

At

at, batch, atq, atrm - queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution. This is the UNIX at command and atd daemon, which allow for scheduling of one-off commands to be run when specified.

More notes HERE


Auto Schedule Restore

This package checks whether the schedule is present on each boot, If a schedule is in place it is backed up to flash, otherwise the schedule and any favourites list are restored from the flash backup. The schedule will be deemed to be present if there is at least one schedule item or one reservation item existing

NOTES:-

  • After a re-boot the restore process will start and "Schedule Restored . . . Rebooting" will be displayed on the front display
  • A second re-boot will take place automatically after 15 seconds to finalise the restoration process
  • The Web-if will display "The recording schedule has been automatically restored" after the second re-boot


Auto-Unprotect

The Auto-Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings on the HDR-Fox T2. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way as a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any High Definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter, new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect HERE to fix any 'missed files'.

Auto, Auto-Unprotect makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP, Note, Foxy does not remove DTCP which is required for DLNA decryption

NOTES:-

  • Auto-Unprotect does not decrypt the file, however it does make decryption possible by the same means as for a Standard Definition file - see flow chart HERE.
  • Auto-Unprotect on the HD-Fox T2 will not allow decryption unless the HD-Fox T2 is running in BootHDR mode

Auto-Update

This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them. It will check once per day at the earliest power on - for most people probably the 04:30 boot.


Badnts

Utility to fix a recording error where a full size TS file is recorded but the associated NTS file generated by the Humax is of zero length, this results in the the Humax rejecting the file on playback. After the recording is decrypted in a folder that is marked for auto-decyption, the utility will look for a zero length NTS file and if found the NTS, THM and HMT files will all be deleted (or moved to the [Deleted] folder), this will make the TS file playable on the Humax,however as the 'sidecar' files have been removed there will be some play-back limitations, e.g. transport controls etc. Notes

  • This utility only works on HDR-Fox T2 not HD-Fox T2
  • Only files stored in an auto-decrypt folder will be fixed


Bash

Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced Sh (Shell) Command line / scripting language. See Reference Guide


Betaftpd

For HDR-Fox T2

The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server. The default server will still be available after the Custom Firmware is installed, however only files under ‘Media’ are visible. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF

For HD-Fox T2

Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.


Blocklist

See Transmission (torrent) Block List notes HERE.


Bookmark

The Humax Bookmarks used to place 'jump-to' points within a recording are also used by several Custom Firmware packages, as Follows:-

  • Edit On Box . . . A single or multiple bookmarks are used as cut and join points for editing a recording in the Web-If Crop option
  • Set Thumbnails . . . Uses the the first bookmark in a recording as a central point from which to pick a new thumbnail
  • Arbookmarks . . . Bookmarks are automatically added to a recording at Accurate Recording start and stop points so that a Crop can be performed


BootHDR

This package is for the HD-FOX T2 only (NOT for HDR-Fox T2)

It allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume. BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-

opkg install wget

opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall

Once the package is installed you can run in HDR-Fox T2 mode, while in this mode, the front panel display will freeze and the box will be incapable of making new recordings. To initiate HDR-Fox T2 mode copy the *Modsettings/TriggerHDR folder to the root of drive1 and then re-boot the HD-Fox T2

Installing the BootHDR package also adds the command line keyword bootHDRmode, this can be used to invoke HDR mode

There is a Guide to using BootHDR on the Wiki HERE


Boot_Settings

Set system parameters to specified values on every boot. [Update settings]


Bsed

Binary-safe search/replace utility.


BusyBox

Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system. Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix Sh (Shell) commands that can be used in Telnet sessions. The list below shows the available commands. There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extension to get some help e.g. ls -?

A command look up table can be found HERE.

NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing.

  • [
  • [[
  • ar
  • arp
  • arping
  • ash
  • awk
  • base64
  • basename
  • bunzip2
  • bzcat
  • bzip2
  • cal
  • cat
  • catv
  • chgrp
  • chmod
  • chown
  • chroot
  • cksum
  • clear
  • cmp
  • comm
  • cp
  • cpio
  • cut
  • date
  • dc
  • dd
  • df
  • diff
  • dirname
  • dos2unix
  • du
  • echo
  • ed
  • egrep
  • env
  • ether-wake
  • expr
  • false
  • fgrep
  • find
  • fold
  • free
  • ftpget
  • ftpput
  • fuser
  • grep
  • gunzip
  • gzip
  • hd
  • head
  • hexdump
  • ifconfig
  • insmod
  • install
  • iostat
  • kill
  • killall
  • killall5
  • last
  • less
  • ln
  • logname
  • ls
  • lsmod
  • lsusb
  • lzcat
  • lzma
  • md5sum
  • mkdir
  • mkfifo
  • mknod
  • mktemp
  • modinfo
  • modprobe
  • more
  • mpstat
  • mv
  • nc
  • netstat
  • nice
  • nmeter
  • nohup
  • nslookup
  • od
  • patch
  • pgrep
  • ping
  • pkill
  • pmap
  • printenv
  • printf
  • ps
  • pstree
  • pwd
  • pwdx
  • readlink
  • realpath
  • renice
  • rm
  • rmdir
  • rmmod
  • route
  • rpm
  • sed
  • sendmail
  • seq
  • sh
  • sha1sum
  • sha256sum
  • sha512sum
  • sleep
  • sort
  • split
  • stat
  • strings
  • stty
  • sum
  • sync
  • sysctl
  • tail
  • tar
  • tee
  • telnet
  • test
  • tftp
  • time
  • top
  • touch
  • tr
  • traceroute
  • true
  • tty
  • uname
  • uniq
  • unix2dos
  • unlzma
  • unxz
  • unzip
  • uptime
  • usleep
  • uudecode
  • uuencode
  • vi
  • watch
  • wc
  • wget
  • which
  • who
  • whoami
  • xargs
  • xz
  • xzcat
  • yes
  • zcat


cfupdater

A flash update script for updating the custom firmware on an HDR without using USB sticks, It should be run in maintenance mode and does not currently support updating the loader.

Once the package has been installed, copy the hdf file onto the hard disk (or make it available in maintenance mode), then reboot into maintenance mode and send a command line in the form :-

/mod/sbin/cfupdater <hdf-file>

If you need remote progress, then you can telnet back into the box after the connection has closed then

 tail -f /tmp/cfupdate.log


Channeldel

Note: now superseded by tunefix

Automatic channel deletion. select TV channels to be permanently removed from the group TV list in Web-If >> Settings >> Automatic Channel Deletion, selected channels, plus a set of 9 unavailable channels known to cause problems will be automatically deleted the next time the Humax is booted, and following any retune

Select all but one file and press delete to reduce the current list in /mod/boot/chandel.conf, the remaining file can be deleted later


ChaseDecrypt

Retrieve and decrypt recording whilst recording is still in progress, uses Chaseget

See ChaseDecrypt for further details

Chaseget

Retrieve and decrypt recording, can run whilst recording is still in progress

This is intended to be used as part of other packages (such as detectads) rather than installed and used standalone

Runs as first stage of pipeline, output is always to stdout

Usage= /mod/bin/chaseget recording.ts start_offset logfile > output.ts

CIFS

The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote file systems must currently be performed from the command line. Example :-


mkdir /media/NAS

mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS"

mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def

mount -t cifs //server/share "/media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def

CLI

This is an acronym for Command Line Interface, a CLI can be established by Telnetting into the Humax and being presented with a CLI prompt, If the Tmenu is displayed there will be a 'cli' option to gain the CLI prompt e.g. humax#


Content Sharing

Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Content Sharing = On

Content Sharing is an in-built DLNA / UPnP server that allows the HDR to stream content over it's LAN connector to a DNLA / UPnP client, this feature is also used by the Custom Firmware to provide decryption of both Standard Definition and High Definition content


Crashdiag

Captures a memory dump (core file) when the main Humax process crashes,The dump files will end up in /mod/core/ called humaxtv.<UNIX timestamp> and a reboot is required following package installation in order to activate it


Crash Log

The Mulitenv 1.4 package contains a procedure that monitors the behaviour of running processes, If the Humax crashes a file will be generated under /mod/tmp/ called crash.log, it can be examined from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files. The Crash log will tell you if Custom Firmware plug-ins are being disabled as a result of the crash, To re-start undelete, redring and ir packages, run Web-If >> Diagnostics >> fix-flash-packages >> Run Diagnostic. To prevent the crash log auto disabling plug-ins, create a file with the following command :-

touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/no_plugin_autodisable


Cron

Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you. It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so Cron does not need to be installed. The tasks are held in a Cron table or crontab. Here is an example crontab :-

humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
humax# cat root
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
humax#

Each line of crontab has the following structure:

<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every

The three examples above will run

  1. at 2AM every day
  2. at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
  3. every 10 Minutes continuously

It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-

crontab -l

To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line


Cryptokey

This is the unique key that is used by the Humax HDR / HD to encrypt and decrypt all recordings on the hard disk, it is made up from the MAC address of the unit (6 pairs of hexadecimal) followed by the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal)

The cryptokey can be examined, changed and reset (Cleared) to the original by sending the following nugget command line options :-

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key:  <no custom key in use>

humax# nugget cryptokey 01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01
Using key:  01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key:  01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey -clear
Cleared custom encryption key.

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key:  <no custom key in use>

The cryptokey is used by the Stripts Package when decrypting files on the Humax

Curl Command

curl command line utility.


Custom TV Portal

An extension to the Humax TV Portal that adds more features.

Full Guide HERE

DB Update

General boot-time database update utility


Dedup (Command Line)

Webif-media-ded.png
Webif-media-ded2.png

The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser.

Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the Web-If that effectively replaces the command line package. However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-

dedup HIDE lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to

dedup -yes HIDE perform the changes as detailed below :-

  • Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
  • Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
  • Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/


Dedup (Series Helper File)

It is possible to create a series helper file that Dedup can use to enhance the re-naming of series, the file should be placed in the directory containing the series and named series.info, Dedup will look for this file and automatically use it, an example of a series.info file is shown below :-

Pilot ==> S1-01
Pilot The Big Bang Theory ==> S1-01
The Big Bran Hypothesis ==> S1-02
The Fuzzy Boots Corollary ==> S1-03
The Luminous Fish Effect ==> S1-04
The Hamburger Postulate ==> S1-05
The Middle Earth Paradigm ==> S1-06
The Dumpling Paradox ==> S1-07
The Grasshopper Experiment ==> S1-08
The Cooper-Hofstadter Polarization ==> S1-09

The above 'full' file is stored here :- http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info


DeRMA

After a Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Set-Return-to-manufacturer (RMA) Mode operation has been carried out, standard Humax software should be re-installed, this should leave the Humax in an 'out-of-the-box' state, however if for any reason the 'RMA' message is still being displayed, then loading this package onto a USB stick and inserting it into the Humax, while it is running, will remove the RMA message


Detectads

This package will attempt to add bookmarks to a recording to indicate the start and end of advert breaks, so that the adverts can be removed with a crop function, cropping can optionally be performed automatically within the package,

Using the new 'Detect while recording' function the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even, with some limitations, start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.

See DetectAds for more information about this package

Disable DSO

Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events. When the Humax carries out a retune all recording Schedule events and all Favourites Lists will be erased, however recorded programmes will not be erased. DSO events are sent to the Humax by the TV broadcasters when they need to change some aspect of the Electronic Programme Guide, such as changing a channel number or adding extra channels

Disable OTA

Disable OTA inhibits any Over The Air software updates transmitted by Humax by deleting OTA schedules created by the Humax, it also has a "Create Reminder to cover OTA Period = Y / N" option in the Settings page, this will create a reminder on the Red Button (channel 200) to cover the OTA period, if you want it to use a different channel or on / off time, you can edit the reminder using the standard Humax on-TV menus, you can also disable the reminder option completely, however if this is done there is a small possibility that an OTA search may still be actioned on your Humax

Note The OTA service for software updates is no longer in operation

Display

A command that can be used to display a message on the HDR-Fox T2 front panel, any alpha-numerics (Max 12 characters) can be displayed, scrolling is not available. The new message will be displayed until the unit is rebooted or changed by the Humax, example :-

/sbin/display 'Twelve Chars'

The display can be blanked with :-

/sbin/display ' '

The display of the HD-Fox T2 (Max 4 characters + colon) can also be used by adding '$' to the string e.g. :-

/sbin/display '$he:lp'

NOTE If the Humax updates the display e.g. after a channel change or is scrolling the display then your message will be removed

DLNA-Filter

Filters out DLNA server network traffic to prevent other DLNA servers from crashing the Humax. File /mod/etc/init.d/S02dlna-filter contains rule="-p tcp --dport 50001 -j DROP". From default the package works on all IP addresses, however in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for DLNA-Filter package, it is possible to restrict operation to one or more specified IP addresses

NOTES

  • DLNA-Filter requires Custom Firmware Version 3.00 or later
  • DLNA-Filter will block access to the Humax DLNA server if the Settings for DLNA-Filter package is left blank


DLNA-Servername

This package enables Humaxs on the same network to be given a unique Media Server Name. It requires that Custom Version 2.20 or above be installed


Dropbear SSH

A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using Telnet to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work. Also allows the use of scp (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.

Login with username=root, password=humax

Create file /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys containing a list of public keys

Note :- chmod 700 /mod/.ssh and chmod 600 /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys


Dropbear SFTP

Greenend-sftp is a plugin for dropbear-ssh which provides SFTP server functionality.SFTP is often used to provide remote virtual filesystem (VFS) access to the Humax's filesystem, e.g. via FUSE. For further info. click link HERE


DUMA

D.U.M.A. - Detect Unintended Memory Access - A Red-Zone memory allocator. It can detect memory leaks and buffer overruns (or underruns) in a malloc() / new memory buffer. DUMA is a fork of Bruce Perens' Electric Fence library.


Dustbin

See Undelete


Dvbsnoop

Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info HERE.

Note that one cannot inspect live streams off air on the Humax, as the Humax doesn't provide the required software interface to its DVB hardware.


E2fs_Progs

Ext2/3/4 File system Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journalling. First allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure HERE.


[Eject]

Eject.png

The Eject icon is displayed (If a USB Device is detected), on all Web-if Headers adjacent to the FREEVIEW icon, when the user clicks on this icon, a list of USB devices attached to the Humax will be displayed with the following information (from Left to Right) :-


  • USB interface name
  • USB Device name
  • Format type, e.g. FAT32, NTFS, EXT3 etc.
  • Device % used
  • Device capacity
  • Eject Option

To the far right there is an eject icon, when the user clicks on this icon, an option will be displayed, e.g. "Eject USB-1? - OK or Cancel, If OK is selected the USB device will be unmounted, this is similar to the Windows option "Safely Remove Hardware"

If 'Device not mounted' is displayed, the user can click on the recycle icon (far right) to display a 'Rescan OK/Cancel' option, this will allow a rescan and the USB device will be re-mounted

NOTES

  • This feature is only present on the HDR-FOX T2, not the HD-FOX T2

EPG

The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-

humax# epg
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.

Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...

  Options:
    -b                     Brief output.
    -d[level]              Set debug level.
    -f<file>               Specify alternate EPG data file.
    -h                     Show help text.
    -p                     Parsable output.

  Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
    -C<CRID>               Show only events with this CRID.
    -D<descriptor type>    Show only selected descriptor type.
    -E<event id>           Show only selected event.
    -R<SCRID>              Show only events with this Series ID.
    -S<service id>         Show only selected service.
    -T<content type>       Show only selected content types.
    -@<unix timestamp>     Show only programmes at time.
    -/<unix timestamp>     Show only programmes on day.
    -/<days>               Show only programmes on day.
    -=<start>:<end>        Show only programmes in time period.

  Commands:
    dump                   Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
    dumpraw                Show raw data from the EPG.
    sqldump                Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
    sqlitedump <file>      Create SQLite database from EPG data.
    now                    Show what is currently on.
    first                  Show the time of the earliest record.
    last                   Show the time of the latest record.
    parse                  Parse the EPG, no output.
    search <text>          Search programme names for text.
    searchall <text>       Search programme names/descriptions for text.

When using the epg command on HD-FOX, note that:

  1. There is no EPG cache file to inspect unless there is a recording drive fitted;
  2. To access the cache, use epg -f /media/drive1/epgsavedata.


Epgfix

epgfix causes a channel change once a day (by default at 4am) for 3 minutes before restoring the original channel it was tuned to. This is enough to trigger the Humax software to keep the EPG up to date when the Humax is on 24/7, (it has no advantage when the unit has a daily on/standby cycle).

You need at least a single service on an alternative mux. to the one the box is tuned to for it to work. Changing to a different service on the same mux. was found not to work reliably enough.

There is no user interface, no settings and nothing to configure. The only thing you can change is the time of operation if it is not suitable! You have to do this manually by editing the /mod/bin/epgfix entry in the /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root file. This is easily available using the File Editor on the WebIf's Diagnostics page.


Epg Keywords (Web-If)

This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords.

NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionality has now been moved to Remote Scheduling Auto.


Initial Setup :-

  • Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
  • Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
  • Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL


Epgpatch

Utility for patching EPG information in a completed recording, it is used to fix problems in TV areas that use non standard EPG data e.g. Ireland Saorview


Enable Telnet

This USB loaded package will re-enable telnet for the Custom Firmware, it performs the following command lines :-

rm -f /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/notelnet
/etc/init.d/S50telnet start << /dev/null >> /dev/null 2>&1

Exfat

This package adds support for reading and writing files in the Exfat format

Please take the time to read the Wikipedia article on exFAT


Exfat Builder

See Exfat above

Exfat-panel.png

Note that this package does not add exFAT support to your system, only provides a simple method for you to do it yourself. This is because there are licence and patent issues around exFAT and if we were to make the compiled exFAT code available in the repository then we would be in violation of at least some of them.

The package provides a web page (accessible from the standard web interface settings screen) from which you can download, build and install the required files in a single step. It will:

  • Download an open-source exFAT implementation from Google Code;
  • Unpack and modify the code to support the Humax;
  • Compile the files into binaries which can run on the Humax;
  • Install the compiled binaries on your system;
  • Add hooks to automatically mount exFAT disks when they are detected.


EXTRA.css

See Webif Style Sheet

Fan

the default fan speeds set by humax are :-

  • 70% - once the HDD temperature reaches 55°C
  • 65% - when the temperature drops to 54°C
  • 55% - when the temperature drops to 51°C
  • 0% - when the temperature drops to 49°C

This utility allows the user to set a minimum continuous fan speed between 0% and 100%, By setting a minimum fan speed higher than zero it is possible to prevent the fan reaching the noisier 70% setting. If the Humax requests a higher speed setting, this higher speed will be used

Notes

  • After an initial Humax restart, this package can change the minimum fan speed on-the-fly every two minutes
  • The fanspeed (0 - 255) is stored in the /mod/boot/fanspeed file
  • Changes made by this package will be displayed in the /tmp/humaxtv.log file, if Diagnostics >> debugtv >> Run Diagnostic has been run
Editing /tmp/humaxtv.log
Sun Sep 15 10:42:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 255 (ff)
Sun Sep 15 10:44:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 0 (0)

Ffmpeg

FFmpeg will record, convert, extract and stream audio and video. It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library. It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link HERE

NOTE:- Ffmpeg operations performed on the Humax can be very demanding on CPU time, especially when performing conversions rather than extractions. The following examples were carried out using a version of Ffmpeg running on a P.C.rather than on the Humax.

Convert an extracted MP3 audio file in MP2 format to the more common MP3:-

ffmpeg -i input.ts -vn -ar 44100 -ac 2 -ab 192000 -f mp3 output.mp3


Extract an MPG file from a Hi-Definition TS file from the Humax :-

ffmpeg -i input.ts -target pal-dvd -vcodec copy -acodec copy output.mpeg

There is also a GUI from end available for the P.C. version of ffmpeg HERE


Fix-disk

Fix-Disk is a disk partition repair utility (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full file system check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem. A fix-disk.log file will be generated in /mod/tmp/ and can be viewed using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files

To invoke the Fix-Disk utility follow the Maintenance Mode Guide HERE


Fix-disk (USB)

As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [HERE].

Fix Flash Packages

If previously installed fix-flash-packages will re-install :- boot-settings, crashdiag, dbupdate, disable-dso, disable-ota, dlna-servername, ir, fan, fix-disk, multienv, multimode, newk, nugget, opkg-beta, poweron-channel, redring, rsvsync, tmenu, tunefix, tweak, undelete, virtual-disk2, webif, webshell

Flatten

This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu. Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder. Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders. After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten.

NOTES

  1. All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
  2. Flatten runs every 15 Minutes when the box is not in standby

Exceptions

  • Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
  • Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
  • Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)


Flatview

FlatView is an alternative to flatten, it provides both a flattened view and a hierarchical view at the same time by creating a new top-level directory (called " [FlatView]" by default). Recordings appear in both without using any additional disk space

NOTES

  • Recordings deleted from the flattened view area are automatically removed from the original location in the hierarchy and the original folder will be removed if it is empty;
  • Recordings deleted from the hierarchical view will be automatically removed from the flattened area too;
  • If a recording is renamed in either area, then the change will be reflected in the other (there may be a small delay);
  • Changes in flags such as 'Unwatched' and the resume point are synchronised across the two locations;
  • If you move a recording out of the flattened view area, the system will think that it has been deleted and will remove the corresponding recording from the hierarchical view area;
  • If you move a recording into the flattened view area, it will be left untouched
  • Command line option = /mod/webif/plugin/flatview/run

Exceptions

  • The contents of folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not appear in [Flatview]
  • The contents of folders with names in square brackets [Like This] will not appear in [Flatview]
  • The contents of folders containing a file named .noflatten will not appear in [Flatview]

Flexget

FlexGet is a multi-purpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, pod-casts, comics, series, movies, etc. It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files, search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.

A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-

*/1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron

  • Flexget Documentation HERE


Flexview

FlexView is intended to offer an alternative to the traditional webif to allow you to view an manage your recording inventory in whatever way suits you

See a Guide to Flexview


Forcedate

This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is required if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using NTP Client.


Foscam

See Guide HERE.


FTP

File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax. The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP server for access to the media folders only. See the Betaftpd package for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required. Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package. If access to the whole file structure is required, programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.

Notes :-

  • To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
  • When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
  • 10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
  • login = humaxftp
  • password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used


Foxlink

Helper package for linking a HD Fox-T2 to a HDR, See Guide Here


Fuse

With FUSE it is possible to implement a fully functional filesystem in a userspace program.


Genre Icons

It is possible to inhibit the Genre Icons displayed in the Web-If, see Web-If Style Sheet


Git

Distributed version control system designed to handle everything from small to very large projects with speed and efficiency.


Grep

Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text. The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file. Syntax Here

Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep

humax# cat original-file.txt

-H      Add 'filename:' prefix
-h      Do not add 'filename:' prefix
-n      Add 'line_no:' prefix
-l      Show only names of files that match
-L      Show only names of files that don't match
-c      Show only count of matching lines
-o      Show only the matching part of line
-q      Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
-v      Select non-matching lines
-s      Suppress open and read errors
-r      Recurse
-i      Ignore case
-w      Match whole words only
-F      PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
-E      PATTERN is an extended regexp
-m N    Match up to N times per file
-A N    Print N lines of trailing context
-B N    Print N lines of leading context
-C N    Same as '-A N -B N'
-e PTRN Pattern to match
-f FILE Read pattern from file

humax# grep match original-file.txt
-l      Show only names of files that match
-L      Show only names of files that don't match
-c      Show only count of matching lines
-o      Show only the matching part of line
-v      Select non-matching lines
-e PTRN Pattern to match
humax#


Gnu Fdisk

GNU fdisk.


Hdparm

hdparm is a command line utility for setting and viewing ATA hard disk drive hardware parameters. It can set parameters such as drive caches, sleep mode, power management, acoustic management, and DMA settings.


HMT

This package displays information on, and allows editing of, the Humax *.hmt file, which is a small 'side-car' file created alongside the main *.ts video file.

From a Telnet session, navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, then enter hmt {filename}

hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt


hmt Options List

humax# hmt
Humax HMT Tool v2.0.6, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: hmt [command] <filename> [filename] ...
  Commands:
    +/-new        Mark/unmark recording as new.
    +/-lock       Mark/unmark recording as locked.
    +/-guidance   Mark/unmark recording as having guidance.
    +/-protect    Enable/disable protection (prevents decryption on copy).
    +/-encrypted  Mark/unmark recording as encrypted.
    +/-shrunk     Mark/unmark recording as shrunk.
    +/-dedup      Mark/unmark recording as deduped.
    +/-detectads  Mark/unmark recording as ad-detection-done.
    -p            Display parseable file information (see *).
    -list         Display file information (default).
    -bookmarks    Display bookmarks.
    +addbookmark=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
    +setbookmarks=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
    +clearbookmarks
    +settitle=<new title>
    +setsynopsis=<new synopsis>
    +setguidance=<new guidance>
    +setfolder=<new folder> (patch hmt only)
    +setfilename=<new filename> (patch hmt only)
    +setgenre=<genre> (can just specifiy initial part)
    +setresume=<resume point (seconds)> (-seconds to set from end)

Generic patch commands:
    +patch8=offset:value     patch 8-bit value
    +patch16=offset:value    patch 16-bit value
    +patch32=offset:value    patch 32-bit value
  Offset and value can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

Generic read commands:
    +read8=offset            read 8-bit value
    +read16=offset           read 16-bit value
    +read32=offset           read 32-bit value
  Offset can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

* Parseable output is tab delimited and contains the following fields:
        Title, Synopsis, HD/SD, LCN, Channel Name,
        Start time, End time, Flags, Guidance, Bookmark count,
        Scheduled start, Scheduled duration, Genre code,
        Resume point, Status/Reason.


Notes

  • +addbookmark=100:200:300 = Add to existing bookmark list
  • +setbookmarks=100:200:300 = replace bookmark list with this new ones
  • +setbookmarks= = same as +clearbookmarks i.e. remove all bookmarks

hmt-linux

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Linux platform (not for the Humax)


hmt-solaris

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Solaris platform (not for the Humax)


Hrwconv

Wrapper script for ffmpeg and sidecar packages to convert 9200T/9150T/9300T files to HDR format

It is recommended that you create a new directory and move your existing 9200T/9150T/9300T files and their sidecars into it, Hrwconv will not make any changes to the originals but will create new files so you will need to ensure that you have enough free disk space.

After installing the package, connect to the Humax via Telnet, change directory 'cd' to the new directory and then run:-

hrwconv *.ts

After a few hours the new files will have been created in the subdirectory 'new'

HTTPS

HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is an extra layer built into the normal HTTP protocol used to access the Web-Interface for the Humax, It provides a more secure connection to the Humax. An HTTPS Server can be enabled in Web-If >> Settings >> General Settings >> HTTPS web server = On


Humaxrw

Utility to copy recordings from a Humax 9200T/9150T/9300T hard disk that is connected to the HDR via USB. The files recorded on 9000 series Humaxs are playable on the HDR, however the HDR can't directly read a hard disk formatted on a 9000 series, Humaxrw will allow the transfer of files between 9000 series and the HDR.

After installing Humaxrw, access to the utility is by Telnet command line.


humax# humaxrw -h
Host <-> Humax disk
===================
Usage: humaxrw [options] HUMAXDISK

  -b            backup all recordings from Humax disk to current directory
  -d <list>     delete recordings
  -g <list>     get recordings to current directory
  -h            help (this text)
  -i <list>     get info for recordings
  -l            list recordings
  -p <filename> put recording(s) onto Humax disk
  -u <list>     unprotect recordings
  -v            version
  -x            extended listing for humaxdiag
  -w            pause at the end waiting for a keypress
  -y            answer yes to all prompts

  Advanced Options
  -D            Delete time shift recording buffers
  -E            Update all synopsis/info data for version 1.00.20 or later
  -H <list>     get hre files for recordings
  -M <n>        modify recording number n (use with -O & -V options)
  -O <n>        offset for modify recording (use with -M & -V options)
  -V <n>        modify recording value (use with -M & -O options)
  -Z            Delete EPG save data

Humax disk -> Humax disk
========================
Usage: humaxrw [options] SRCHUMAXDISK DESTHUMAXDISK

  -b            backup all recordings from source Humax disk
                and copy to destination Humax disk
  -g <list>     get recordings from source disk
                and copy to destination Humax disk

Recovery mode - use if record list is missing/corrupt
=============
Usage: humaxrw -r [options] HUMAXDISK

  -i <list>     get info for recordings
  -l            list recordings
  -n            no info - use if corruption is really bad
  -g <list>     get recordings to current directory as recover_nnnn.ts

Example of a list: 10-20,30,41-42

Humidify

A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files.

humax# humidify
HDF Tool v1.0.4, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: humidify [options] <filename>
  -C                   Skip checksum validation.
  -c <arguments>       Create HDF file ('-c help' for more).
  -d<level>            Enable debugging at level.
  -l                   Show contents of HDF file (default).
  -o                   Use old-style checksum blocks when creating.
  -r                   Don't compress blocks when creating.
  -S<section>          Extract only the numbered section.
  -t                   Test archive (validate checksums).
  -x                   Extract files.
  -s                   Also show/extract member checksums.


Examples:

  View HDF:    humidify file.hdf
  Test HDF:    humidify -t file.hdf
  Extract HDF: humidify -x file.hdf
  Create HDF:  humidify -c file.hdf (run 'humidify -c help' for more)


A cross platform version of Humidify can be downloaded from the packages page, HERE It contains the following files:-

Humidify-1.0.2.zip.jpg


Hwctl

Hardware control utility - Use with caution ! ! !


Id3v2

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also Popol.

Available commands:

  -h,  --help               Display this help and exit
  -f,  --list-frames        Display all possible frames for id3v2
  -L,  --list-genres        Lists all id3v1 genres
  -v,  --version            Display version information and exit
  -l,  --list               Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
  -R,  --list-rfc822        Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
  -d,  --delete-v2          Deletes id3v2 tags
  -s,  --delete-v1          Deletes id3v1 tags
  -D,  --delete-all         Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
  -C,  --convert            Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
  -1,  --id3v1-only         Writes only id3v1 tag
  -2,  --id3v2-only         Writes only id3v2 tag
  -a,  --artist  "ARTIST"   Set the artist information
  -A,  --album   "ALBUM"    Set the album title information
  -t,  --song    "SONG"     Set the song title information
  -c,  --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
                            Set the comment information (both
                             description and language optional)
  -g,  --genre   num        Set the genre number
  -y,  --year    num        Set the year
  -T,  --track   num/num    Set the track number/(optional) total tracks

You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
For example:
        id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".


Inadyn

A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plug-in (see webif settings page). The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby.

For freedns.afraid.org the hostname in settings should be of the form: xxxx.xxxxxxxx.xxxxx, <user name hash> Where <user name hash> is obtained from the freedns website, when logged on

In Use

Utility for checking whether a recording is in use.


I-Phone Interface

An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax.

Screen Shots HERE.


Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)

This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface. Full Details HERE.


lsof

This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files. With no extensions it will default to 'All' open files, but it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-

lsof | grep humaxtv HIDE All files opened by the main Humax TV process

lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq HIDE List all processes that have opened files

lsof | grep epg HIDE All files opened by the EPG process

humax# lsof | grep epg
epg 596 root  cwd  0000  31,0 1307722938  21474853357 /dev
epg 596 root  rtd  0000  31,0 1321652395  77309428205 /
epg 596 root  txt  0000  8,18 1322689164   4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
epg 596 root  mem   REG  8,18                 9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root  mem   REG  31,0                     174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root  mem   REG  8,18                 9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root  mem   REG  31,0                     169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root  mem   REG  31,0                     216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root  mem   REG  31,0                     186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root    0  0000  31,0 1307722935   4294975926 /dev/null
epg 596 root    1  0000  0,13 1322848876   4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
epg 596 root    2  0000  0,13 1322848858   4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log


Jim

Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language) that runs on the Humax unix platform.


Jpnevulator

Serial Port Sniffer.


Joe

Text Editor. See Text Editors.


Kernels

An alternative Kernel for the HDR-Fox T2 is loadable via USB upgrade, the zip files contains copies of the standard kernels and a version with GUID/EFI support


Lighttpd

Lighttpd is a replacement for the mongoose Web server used on the Humax to handle it's Web-If pages. SEE EXAMPLES

For more information on lighttpd click HERE


LDD

ldd prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library specified on the command line


Libpcre

Perl-compatible Regular Expressions Library


Libunwind

Utility used with the Crashdiag package


LibParted

Library for the Parted package


Libsndfile

A C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound.


Loaders

Warning

WARNING !


Although the installation of a new loader only takes a few seconds (unlike a full firmware change), it is imperative that there is no power interruption during the process as this could cause the Humax to become permanently inoperative (bricked)


The Loader - sometimes called the Boot Loader is a small routine that the Humax runs on start-up, the version of your Loader is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the Humax screen immediately after the unit is taken out of standby, there are currently 4 loader versions known to be installed on the HDR-Fox T2, they are :- a730, a731, a733 and a734.

Different versions of loader may improve 'Green Screen' HDMI handshake problems found on some televisions, a link to the hummy.tv discussion can be found HERE


M4

GNU M4 is an implementation of the traditional Unix macro processor. More notes HERE


Maintenance Mode

This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in, to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide HERE

Mediatomb

A UPnP Media Server, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in. There is a user Guide HERE

Mongoose

Mongoose was the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package used to present Web pages, it has been replaced by Lighttpd.


Multienv

Helper utility for modifying the set top environment, Used by other packages.


Multi-mode

See Guide HERE


Mvdisks

Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only) Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB directory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 of the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurrence of 'usb-disk' does not need changing

  • Allows recording directly to a USB drive on the HDR
  • Allows files on a USB drive to be served via DLNA (HDR only)


Network Shares Automount

Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directories to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability


Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the Humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax

This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc).

Notes

  1. The "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
  2. Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
  3. Wake up On LAN (WOL) is available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds. A script called wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
  4. If option ShareFolder = off, the mount will appear in the USB section and either a real USB device or virtual2 must be installed
  5. If option ShareFolder = on, the mount will appear under 'My Video'
Warning-anim.gif

DELETING THE MY VIDEO/[SHARES] FOLDER WILL DELETE FILES ON YOUR REMOTE COMPUTER / LAPTOP/ NAS ETC.


To safely remove the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder :-

  1. Delete the configuration file created in [ModSettings]/NFS or [Modsettings]/SMB
  2. reboot the Humax
  3. Ensure there are no active shares in the [Shares] folder
  4. Turn off the remote device holding the shared files
  5. Delete the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder


Nano

Text Editor, See Text Editors


New Portal

This package adds a new front-end to the standard Humax TV Portal, See guide HERE

Newk

This utility will create a folder on the hard disk with a chosen prefix removed, in order to tidy-up the folder title, so for example when recording a new series called "New: The Walking Dead" a folder will be created called "The Walking Dead" and all new recordings will be placed into it, if the prefix "New: " is placed in Webif >> Settings >> Automatic Series Prefix Removal settings.

Note:- Existing series folder will not be renamed by the Newk package


Nicesplice

A recorded program editing utility, See Edit On box Guide, Nicesplice also 'Shrinks' the file using Stripts


Nsplice

Nsplice is supplied with the DetectAds package, it is a version of the Nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.


NTFS 3g

Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can only read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access


NTFS Progs

This utility contains diagnostic tools and a utililty to format a partition as NTFS


Ntp Client

Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection or your Humax doesn't keep good time. Ntpclient runs with the -l option which also adjusts the time in between system boots.

Note :- This utility may also need Forcedate to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes HERE


Nugget

Nugget framework, handles a number of utilities sent from the commeand line, current option are :-

nugget <command>
  ping             - Test nugget connectivity.
  status           - Show nugget status and version.
  schedule.load    - Load recording schedule from disk.
  schedule.save    - Save recording schedule to disk.
  schedule.slot    - Update timers for schedule slot.
  schedule.db      - sqlite3 database handle info.
  schedule.epg     - Display EPG information for slot.
  schedule.timers  - Show internal timers.
  cryptokey        - Set or display encryption key.

OPKG

Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-

opkgHID= list all opkg commands

opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk HID= Install a remote package

opkg download auto-unprotect HID= download current version of a remote package (Version number not allowed)

opkg listHID= list of available packages

opkg list-installedHID= list of installed packages

opkg remove auto-unprotectHID= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers

opkg install undelete --force-reinstall HID= Force a package reinstall

opkg whatdepends anacron HID= Show dependants


Opkg-beta

When this package is installed beta versions of installed packages will be made available in 'Package Management >> Upgrades' screen


Parted

GNU Partition Editor. On-line User Manual HERE

Popol

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also Id3v2


     -s, --songname           set songname
     -a, --artist             set artist
     -l, --album              set album
     -c, --comment            set comment
     -y, --year               set release year
     -t, --tracknum           set track number



Portal Foscam

See GUIDE


Portal Xtra1

See Guide HERE


Portal Xtra1 (USB)

This is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide HERE


Poweron-Channel

NOTE:- This package was replaced by the Boot-Settings package with the release of Webif 1.4

This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed, After installing the Poweron-Channel package, select options in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for poc package >> Click here for settings


  • Power-On Channel = Selected TV Channel for start-up (See note 1)
  • Volume = 0-20 or Last Audio Volume
  • Power-On Channel Group = Select Favourites List or None


  • Disable Subtitles on every boot (See Note 3)
  • Turn the DLNA server on at every boot (See Note 3)


NOTES

  1. Ensure that the selected Poweron TV channel is included in the selected Favourite group
  2. A scheduled wake-up will use the channel set in the on-TV menus at Settings>>Preferences>>Time>>Channel not the Power-On Channel settings
  3. Only available by editing /mod/boot/pox using Diagnostics >> File Editor (details below)
  4. The parameters set by Poweron-Channel are contained in the /var/lib/humaxtv/setup.db database, other items may be added to the pox file from this database, but please use extreme caution, their functions are not fully understood
humax# cat /mod/boot/pox
# Poweron-channel additional options.

# Example: uncomment the following line to disable subtitles on every boot
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:SUBTITLE_DISPLAY_F:1

# Example: uncomment the following line to turn the DLNA server on at each
# boot in case it has been turned off.
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:DMS_START_ON:1


Procps

procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc file system. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link HERE


Prog Backup

Utility for backing up recordings and side-car files to locally attached drives, A search of attached drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-


progbackup HIDE Backup everything under My Video

progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/" HIDE Backup files in a specified folder

NOTE:- Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.


Python

A package that adds the Python programming language


Python Setuptools

Setup tools including Easy_Install for the Python programming language, see notes [HERE]


Qtube

Simple webif to queue youtube downloads to run in the Auto process queue, see Youtube-dl


Recmon

Utility for executing another process whenever a recording starts or finishes

Recmon runs every script in /mod/etc/recmon.d in response to events. The order that they are run in is not guaranteed (they actually run in parallel). The commands are run with two arguments, a switch saying which event triggered this and the base name of the recording file (no extension).

e.g.

/mod/etc/recmon.d/test -start "/media/My Video/path/to/recording"

Flags are -start, -stop, -move and -delete. Usually -move is called twice, once for the source location and once for the destination.


Examples

/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -start "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -stop "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"

Rc app bridge

Utility that enables the Humax HDR-Fox T2 to be controlled by the TV Remote App. (supplied by Humax) that runs on the I-Phone, the same App. is also available on the Android platform, however version HMARG 1.0.4 does not appear to work with this package

Notes

  • This package requires Content Share to be enabled


Real Time Scheduling (RTS)

When the Custom Firmware was developed, Scheduled events created in the Web-If or Via Remote Scheduling were placed into a pending queue and only moved into the main schedule on the next boot or reboot, In Web-If version 1.3.2-1 and later, it is possible to automatically progress from the 'Pending' stage directly to a fully scheduled stage without the Humax having to perform a boot cycle. This option can be enabled / disabled with the :- Settings >> Advanced Settings >> Real Time Scheduling Yes / No option


Redring

Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings

GENERAL SETTINGS
Humax Status Humax Default With Redring Redring Setting
Show Purple When dual Recording 11% Amber Purple On / Off
Enable Debugging Log N/A Debug On / Off


WHEN FULLY AWAKE i.e. TV Display = On
Humax Status Humax Default With Redring Redring Setting
Disable Screen Scrolling Scrolling On Scrolling Off On / Off
Enable Clock Clock Off Clock On On / Off
Show Elapsed Time During Playback N/A Elapsed Time On / Off
Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock N/A HH:MM On / Off
Override LED Ring Brightness

Blue Brightness

Red Brightness

Fixed

100% > 50%

after 3 Mins.

Switchable Override

Variable

Variable

On / Off

0% to 100%

0% to 100%

Override Display Brightness

Brightness

Fixed

Fixed

Switchable Override

Variable

On / Off

0% to 100%

Override Playback Display Brightness

Brightness

Fixed

Fixed

Switchable Override

Variable

On / Off

0% to 100%


WHEN HALF AWAKE i.e. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search
Humax Status Humax Default With Redring Redring Setting
Show Blue LED Ring

Brightness

Fixed

11% Amber

Switchable Blue

Variable

On / Off

10% to 100%

Show Red LED Ring (Recording)

Brightness

Fixed

11% Amber

Switchable Red

Variable

On / Off

10% to 100%


WHEN IN STANDBY i.e. Hard Disk Not Spinning
Humax Status Humax Default With Redring Redring Setting
Override LED Ring Brightness

Brightness

Fixed

11% Amber

Switchable Override

Amber Brightness

On / Off

0% to 100%

Override Display Brightness

Brightness

Fixed

11%

Switchable Override

Variable

On / Off

0% to 100%


HIDE ** = Change from Humax default

Notes

  • Redring can cause slight delay of Remote Control key presses, e.g. Pause etc.
  • Problems writing to the /mod/tmp/redring.log will be listed in the /var/log/humaxtv.log after diagnostics >> debugtv is run

Renumber

Renumber.png

Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.

Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.

Notes

  • The renumber settings appears under the "reorder" section of the settings page on the Web-If
  • The Tune Fix package has replaced the Renumber package

Reset Webif

Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be executable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.


Remote Scheduling (RS)

Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser

Full Guide HERE


Remote Scheduling Auto

Full Guide HERE


Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode

Full Guide HERE


Remote Scheduling Mobile

Full Guide HERE

rs

Command line tool that carries out a number of functions relating to the Remote Scheduling service, e.g. :-

humax# rs
Humax Remote Scheduling Tool v1.3.1, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: rs [options] <command>...

  Options:
    -d[level]              Set debug level.
    -D<seconds>            Sleep for random(seconds).
    -h                     Show help text.
    -i                     Show detected machine info.
    -q                     Be more quiet.

  Commands:
    register <email>       Register this device.
    push                   Push scheduled events.
    cmd                    Retrieve next queued command.
    ack <id>               Acknowledge command <id>.
    status                 Show device registration status.
    log <msg>              Send log message to server.
    epg                    Distributed EPG management.

rs time

Command line utility that returns a number in seconds, that indicates the time offset between your Humax unit and the Remote Servers time


RMA

The Return to MAnufacturer Web-If option under Diagnostics removes Custom Firmware files from the internal hard disk drive of the HDR Fox T2, following an RMA the user should re-install a version of official Humax Software to complete the 'Out of the Box' status of the Humax

Notes

  • After running the procedure, 'RMA' will be displayed in the front panel display, this message should be removed after the official Humax Software is installed, however if the message is still present, it is possible to remove it by running the DeRMA USB package
  • More options for removing the Custom Firmware are detailed in the Remove Modified Firmware page


Rsvsync

Boot-time reservation sync service


Rsync

A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-

rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup

This cronjob example would run at 01:05 each day, keeping the internal and external disks in sync - you just need to ensure the box is on at that time via a reminder or other mechanism.

5 1 * * * /mod/bin/rsync --archive --delete-after --log-file=/mod/tmp/rsync.log /media/My\ Video/ /media/drive1/Video/

The Custom Firmware and Humax setup can be copied from an existing Humax to a new Humax by installing the rsync and dropbear packages on both units and then entering Maintenance Mode on the new Humax and sending the following two command lines :-

rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/var/lib/humaxtv/ /var/lib/humaxtv/

rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/mnt/hd2/mod/ /mnt/hd2/mod/

More Info.


rt3070

This package was a replacement wireless driver which allowed for a wider range of wireless dongle vendor types, it was removed from the packages list because version 1.0 is not compatible with the latest 1.03.XX versions of Custom firmware


Safe Mode

Safe Mode is a package loaded onto the Humax via USB in the same way as a software upgrade, it temporarily switches off most Custom Firmware components (apart from a small web server that allows you to get back out of safe more when you want), there is a package called enablesafemode.spk to turn this feature on and another called disablesafemode.spk to turn it back off, they are available frrom the Firmware Download page

Note if you have altered the encryption keys on your humax that any recordings made in safe mode will be made using the standard encryption and won't be, automatically, viewable when you return to normal mode.


Samba

Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax file system from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols

To map a network drive in windows :-

  1. Click Start, click My Network Places, click Entire Network, and then double-click Microsoft Windows Network.
  2. Double-click the domain that you want to open.
  3. Double-click the computer that has the shared resource you want to map. All the shared resources for that computer automatically appear in the window.
  4. Right-click the shared drive or folder that you want to map, and then click Map Network Drive.
  5. Click the drive letter that you want to use, and then specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer.
  6. Note Network drives are mapped by using letters starting from the letter Z. This is the default drive letter for the first mapped drive you create. However, you can select another letter if you want to use a letter other than Z.

Drive sizes can be incorrectly reported, to avoid this set path = /media/My Video in the /mod/etc/smb.conf file

Tips

  1. Ensure Samba is enabled in Web-If >> Service Management
  2. If the Windows 'WORKGROUP' has been changed from default, edit file /mod/etc/smb.conf to match the new name

Schedchk

Check scheduled recordings against EPG and reschedule, if possible, entries that don't match the EPG

See the user guide for further details

Scons

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool—that is, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic Make utility with integrated functionality similar to autoconf/automake and compiler caches such as ccache. In short, SCons is an easier, more reliable and faster way to build software


Screensaver

If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :- /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plug-ins using the Web-If >> Settings screen

When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plug-in shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-


3X5

>>>

3X5.png Neon

>>>

Neon.png Avatar

>>>

Avatar.png
7Seg

>>>

7Seg.png Neon-Blue

>>>

Neon-blue.png Wedge

>>>

Wedge.png
Dot

>>>

Dot.png Agen

>>>

Agen.png Cursor

>>>

Cursor.png
VFD

>>>

VFD.png Glass-Blue

>>>

Glass-b.png Maze

>>>

Maze.png

screensaver-all = Install all current screensavers from the package server

screensaver-random = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers

Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plug-ins as follows e.g.:-

humax# screensaver
   1: 3X5
   2: 7Seg
   3: Black
   4: Cursor
   5: Humax Default 
   6: Neon
   7: Neon-Blue
   8: VFD
Choose option [1-8]:

NOTES:-

  • The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
  • If screensaver-all is installed, it must be uninstalled before other screensaver plug-ins are uninstalled
  • If any of the screensaver Plug-ins are uninstalled the display will default to Humax Default


Sed

GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes HERE or HERE


Series Filer

NOTE

The Series Filer package is no longer supported, the functions it carried out can be replicated by the Sweeper package, the following notes have been retained for reference only.

This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode

NOTE:-

The early versions of Series Filer were not compatible with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory was not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer versions before 0.2.2 with any version of the Undelete package, version 0.2.2 and above are safe to use


Service Control

A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.


From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-

service

humax# service

Name                 Installed  Autostart  Running
----                 ---------  ---------  -------
mediatomb            No         No         No
dropbear             No         No         No
transmission         No         No         No
samba                No         No         No
cifs                 No         No         No
mongoose             Yes        Yes        Yes

Syntax:
        service start <service>
        service stop <service>
        service auto <service>          (toggles autostart) 


Sh (SHell)

Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language


Sidecar

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Sidecar Files

Recreates sidecar files .hmt and .nts from a .ts source file.

Command line options :-

humax#sidecar

sidecar v2.5, a utility for the Humax HD/HDR Fox T2, by raydon (c) 2014-2018
Usage: sidecar [-options] <recording name minus .ts extension>

        -n : Create new .nts file
        -h : Create new or update existing .hmt file
        -x : Exclude Prog/PMT ID's from .hmt file
        -c : <Channel number for .hmt file>
        -t : <Channel name for .hmt file>
        -p : Display progress bar
        -i : Display infomation

Enclose recording or channel name in quotes if they contain spaces or special characters e.g. &.


humax#

NOTES

  1. The Sidecar package must be installed using the Web-If >> Main screen >> Package Management >> Available screen
  2. TS files must be decrypted before running Sidecar, If the TS is encrypted see note 5 below
  3. Source video not native to the HDR/HD Fox T2, or that has been processed using some third party application may not be compatible
  4. There are versions of sidecar complied for Linux and Windows platforms Here
  5. if the ts file is encrypted, the package will create dummy hmt and nts files to allow the file to be decrypted i.e :-
  • Use Sidecar to create the dummy hmt and nts files
  • Once indexed by the DLNA server, manually decrypt via 'Opt+' menu in Web-If
  • When the TS file is decrypted, simply run Sidecar again to create hmt and nts files providing full transport control.
  • There is no need to delete the dummy hmt or nts files since sidecar will detect these, and replace them with valid files
  • Sidecar can recreate valid hmt and nts file for both video and radio recordings

Smartmontools

This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T. hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-

mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A

or

mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a HIDE for more details

Documentation HERE


humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME          FLAG     VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE      UPDATED  WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
  1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate     0x000f   114   099   006    Pre-fail  Always       -       66811863
  3 Spin_Up_Time            0x0003   097   097   000    Pre-fail  Always       -       0
  4 Start_Stop_Count        0x0032   098   098   020    Old_age   Always       -       2878
  5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct   0x0033   100   100   036    Pre-fail  Always       -       0
  7 Seek_Error_Rate         0x000f   078   060   030    Pre-fail  Always       -       70502101
  9 Power_On_Hours          0x0032   097   097   000    Old_age   Always       -       3294
 10 Spin_Retry_Count        0x0013   100   100   097    Pre-fail  Always       -       0
 12 Power_Cycle_Count       0x0032   099   099   020    Old_age   Always       -       1439
184 End-to-End_Error        0x0032   100   100   099    Old_age   Always       -       0
187 Reported_Uncorrect      0x0032   097   097   000    Old_age   Always       -       3
188 Command_Timeout         0x0032   100   100   000    Old_age   Always       -       0
189 High_Fly_Writes         0x003a   093   093   000    Old_age   Always       -       7
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022   055   044   045    Old_age   Always   In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
194 Temperature_Celsius     0x0022   045   056   000    Old_age   Always       -       45 (0 13 0 0)
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered  0x001a   048   039   000    Old_age   Always       -       66811863
197 Current_Pending_Sector  0x0012   100   100   000    Old_age   Always       -       0
198 Offline_Uncorrectable   0x0010   100   100   000    Old_age   Offline      -       0
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count    0x003e   200   200   000    Old_age   Always       -       0

NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda


SQLite3

SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc. With readline support (arrow key editing and history)


SRT

The Humax is able to play subtitles for MP4 and AVI files if the subtitle information is contained in an *.srt file, the following conditions must be met :-

  • The srt file must have the same title as the video file e.g. Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.srt for Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.avi
  • The .srt file needs to be saved as a text file specifically with ANSI encoding to avoid using fonts that are licensed

Notes

1) Windows Notepad will produce a ANSI encoded srt file

2) Saving the .srt file with UTF-7 encoding is reported to be more compatible with the Humax

3)A method for extracting SRT files from a Humax *.TS file has been documented on the Hummy.tv forum HERE

SSMTP

SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a mail host or mail hub, It will not handle incoming E-Mail


Status

A Command line (Telnet) command that shows what the Humax is (and will be) doing, e.g. :-

humax# status
Recording Pretty Woman_20121201_2310
Watching 12: Dave - Would I Lie to You? (23:00 - 23:40) [7%]
Will record 'The Omen' on Film4 at 23:15

Note :- The same information is also displayed automatically on several Web-If screens e.g. The Main Screen and the Remote screen


Strace

Strace (System Trace) is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. It is used to monitor interactions between processes and the Linux kernel, which include system calls, signal deliveries, and changes of process state.


Stripts

This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

Humax TS Stripper Tool v1.4.2, by af123, 2012-18.

Syntax: stripts [options] <input> [output]
    -a          Analyse an input file.
    -A          Quickly analyse an input file.
    -c          Check if there are any EIT packets.
    -C          Show address of first EIT packet.
    -D          Dump NTS file.
    -E          Check if file is encrypted.
    -f          Also fix PAT packets.
    -F          Only fix PAT packets.
    -T          Dump TS file.
    -v          Verbose.
    -X          Add bookmarks at programme start/end.
    -Z          Extract EPG data from recording (incomplete).
    -z          Analyse entire TS file.
    -@ <key>    Decrypt recording with <key>.
    -/ <key>    Check encryption key against recording. (* See NOTE Below)
    -d [level]  Increase debug level or set debug level.

* NOTE :- This option has been reported to return "Incorrect" when using the correct key in the Windows version

stripts -F filename HI = Fix file

stripts -f filename HI = remove redundant EIT packets

stripts -v filename HI = Verbose

stripts -S filename HI = demux the raw audio stream into a file-name.audio file

NOTE Version 1.4.0 and above of strips also has a file decryption facility, this facility works on both Standard Definition and High Definition recordings and does not require Hi-Def recordings to have the 'ENC' flag removed with the Auto-Unprotect package, it does not require a DLNA URL to be allocated or the DLNA server to be running on the Humax, here is an example of a command line decryption using Stripts :-

stripts -@@ <input> <output>

stripts -@ 000378bd11f336333731303434393630 "input file name" "output file name"

1) In the first example above -@@ automatically inserts the resident Humax encryption key, (When the process is run on the original Humax recorder)

2) The Second example above is used when the decryption is being carried out on a different Humax unit (or on a computer), the original unit's encryption key must be entered, e.g :- for a MAC address of 00-03-78-bd-11-f3 and a serial number of 6371044960-1234, enter 000378bd11f3 followed by the first 10 digits of the serial number in hexidecimal e.g. 36333731303434393630 (adding a '3' before each digit from the serial number)

Here is a key compiled from the info. on the Humax label (Bottom panel) :-

Humax-Key.png









"input file name" and "output file name" are full *.ts file names, up to, but not including the .ts (Quotes are required for name with spaces)

There are versions of stripts that can perform offline decryption on various computer platforms including :- Linux, MacOSX and Windows etc., (NOTE :- The Windows version also requires cygwin1.dll) See Link HERE

Swapper

Swapper is a utility to change the Humax's swap file size to 128

Sweeper

Sweeper is a package which re-locates recordings under My Video and files them away automatically for you according to specified criteria, Sweeper can also replicate the Series Filer and flatten packages

There is a comprehensive guide to the Sweeper Graphical User Interface HERE


Command Line operation

Sweeper rules can also be generated manually by editting the /mod/etc/sweeper.conf file, available from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File editor


Example 1)

action {move "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (which must exist)

action {movecreate "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (folder will be created)

Example 2)

lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous} HI = Move single files from channels 70 - 79 to Children/Miscellaneous folder

action {move _misc} HI = Move all remaining single files into a folder called _misc

Example 3)

action {movecreate(Test-%genre-%definition-%title-%channel-%lcn-%duration-%timestamp)} HI = Expanded to Test-Entertainment-SD-Tim Minchin and the Heritage...-Channel 4-4-87-20130824233802]

Example 4)

folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"} HI = Move the contents of a series created folder to an existing sub folder e.g. from /Octonauts to /Children/Octonauts/Series 3

Example 5)

folder action {fileunder ""} HI = emulates the old seriesfiler package

Example 6)

Notes :-

  • lines starting with '#' are comments
  • A full list of commands are detailed in the Sweeper Guide HERE
# Sweep single Big Bang episodes into the series folder
lcn 4 title "Big Bang" action {move "The Big Bang Theory"}
# Move anything recorded from a children's channel to the Miscellaneous folder
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} duration {>= 90} lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} genre Film lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}
folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}
folder lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {fileundercreate Children}
title {Formula 1} action {move F1}


Subtitles

See SRT

Swifi

A utility that can retrieve and display your current Wi-fi configuration, it's location is :- /sbin/swifi


Sysmon

HDD-Temp.png
CPU.png
Network.png

A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-

  • Hard Disk Temperature

Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the Smartmontools package, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days. All graphs have a zoom feature which is implemented with a mouse 'click / drag' or a touchscreen 'pinch / expand'

  • CPU Utilisation

Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

  • Network Utilisation

Displays a graph showing Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days


The data used to build the graphs is held in file /mod/monitor/monitor.db, currently the tables include :-

  1. SMART = Hard disk sector relocation information (Not currently displayed as a graph)
  2. Temp = the Hard Disk Temperature information
  3. Vmstat = CPU Utilisation data for Idle, Wait, User, System
  4. Net = Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors
  5. State = state (Not currently displayed as a graph)

Note You can reset the database with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> sysmon/purge >> Run Diagnostic


System Flush

The System Flush Update File is a package that is installed in the same way as a firmware update to perform a full system flush and reset, it reformats the areas of flash used for persistent data like the schedule, there are two of these flash areas and they use the JFFS2 filesystem.

The package is designed to assist recovery from crash/reboot loops.Your recordings will not be affected.'NB: This will also clear most CFW package settings.


TCL Check

Utilities for syntax checking TCL (or Jim) files


Tcpfix

This package Modifys the TCP stack to fix download problems that appears to be related to RFC1323 TCP window scaling in the Linux 2.6.18 kernel that the Humax uses


TCP Ping

Simple TCP ping utility.


Telnet

Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as PuTTY, Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will see the humax# prompt.


It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet

See RED set-up notes below, to prevent errors when entering text

Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet

Follow THIS LINK for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection

Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for ls -al

C:\> telnet

Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client  Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'

 open 10.0.0.200

humax# ls -al
total 17
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root  192 Jan 10 09:10 .
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root  192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
drwxr-xr-x  2 root root  474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
.......
drwxr-xr-x  4 root root   88 Jan 10 09:10 var
humax#

to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d

Microsoft Telnet >
to exit from Telnet enter q
C:\>

NOTES

  • Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a Yellow Background
  • [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked'
  • [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf
  • The Humax has a Built-In Telnet Welcome Screen, See Tmenu for details


Telnet Commands

The majority of Unix / Linux command line keywords can be used on the Humax, if you are not familiar with them, there are a few of the more basic commands and their meanings here :-

  • cd = change directory, used to navigate around the file structure
  • cd "/media/My Video" = navigate to the top level of My Video
  • pwd = print working directory, tells you where you are in the file structure
  • ls -al = list contents of the current directory
  • touch "/media/My Video/dummy.ts" = create an empty file called dummy.ts in the My Video directory


Tempmon

This package checks the HDD temperature every three minutes and will raise a warning if a configurable thresholds is exceeded, the warning is displayed on the HDR-Fox T2's front panel and the centre 'button' flashes. The Setting >> Tempmon page shows the current Hard Disk temperature and has defaults as follows :- Alert If = 50, Attempt to go into standby if = 60 and Immediate power off If = 70 Deg C

Note If the Fan package is not installed the normal Humax routine will turn the fan on at 56 Deg C, so it is suggested that 'Alert If' should be set to 60 Deg C and the other two parameters are set to 65 and 70 Deg C


Text Editors

There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details HERE). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of Vi built into the custom Busybox package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware). There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. Vim Basic, Vim Standard, Joe and Nano.

If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's sed


Tmenu

This built-in package adds a menu to the Telnet Login screen Menu

Enter 0000 for system PIN. Note:- this is the default

Menu Version 1.13
Enter System PIN :

      /-------------------------\
      |  T E L N E T   M E N U  |
      \-------------------------/

  [ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03 ] or [Humax HD-Fox T2 (humaxhd) 1.02.29/2.15]

    1 - Restart into maintenance mode.
    2 - Remove web interface password.
 stat - Show what the box is currently doing.
    x - Exit and close connection.
 rset - Reset custom firmware environment.
 srma - Set return-to-manufacturer (RMA) mode.
 diag - Run a diagnostic.
  cli - System command line (advanced users).


Please select option:

NOTE :- It is possible to skip the above Menu and go directly to the Command Line Interface by selecting Expert mode telnet server = On in the Web-If >> Settings >> Advanced Settings


Tnftp

The Humax HDR has a built-in FTP Server for transfer of files from Humax to a remote client and an improved FTP Server called Betaftpd to replace it in the HDR, and to add it to the HD, the Tnftp package provides an FTP Client for file transfer from a remote FTP server to the Humax

tnftp is a port of the NetBSD FTP client.


Transmission (Bit Torrent)

The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.

Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from

For command line access enter :-

transmission-remote

/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. HERE


  • Go into service control and start Transmission
  • Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
  • Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
  • Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
  • Select browse in the window and highlight the previously downloaded *.torrent file
  • When highlighted select 'Open'
  • Select 'Upload'
  • If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
  • A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads

Blocklist

The torrent system is a 'two-way' process which can allow other users to access your downloaded files, this access can cause a security risk and it is suggested that a block list is set up to prevent this, the Block list contains a set of IP address's not allowed access.

To create or add to a blocklist go to Transmission >> Preferences (Bottom left 'Spanner') >> Peers >> Blocklist and Enable Blocklist, then go to a block list site such as http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php and copy an Update URL e.g. http://list.iblocklist.com/?list=bt_level1&fileformat=p2p&archiveformat=gz from there to the Block list URL box and click on Update, This process can be repeated to build up bigger lists

It is also possible to place *.txt files containing blocklists into the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules

Notes

  • When the block lists are initially being converted into *.bin files, transmission uses an excessive amount of CPU time, this could cause errors in recording, so it is suggested that this is done when the Humax is idle.


Transportx

This package provides some additional functionality to the 'transport' controls. A reboot will be required after installation.

When this package is installed the following changes are made to the transport controls:

The first press of the pause button will pause as before but subsequent presses will each advance by one frame. Use the play button to resume normal playback.​ ​ After the slow (trick mode) button is pressed, slow mode is activated, the Rewind and FFwd buttons will then slow it down or speed it up respectively. To change direction first pause and then select a direction using Rewind/FFwd (it will then start moving at the slowest speed). Repeated presses of these buttons will speed up/slow down still further. Press Play to resume normal operation.​

  • Slow button: x1/2 fwd​
  • Rew button: x1/4 fwd​
  • Rew button: x1/8 fwd​
  • Rew button: x1/16 fwd​ [Further presses of the rewind button will not change the speed or direction]​
  • Pause button: pause​
  • Rew button: x1/16 rew​
  • Rew button: x1/4 rew​
  • Rew button: x1 rew​

​ If the FFwd button is pressed instead then the above sequence is reversed.​

Known bugs:

When playing a remote recording via a dlna network connecton, a frame advance occurs only on alternate presses of the pause button.​ The onscreen display of speed/direction will be incorrect when using the slow modes - this is very unlikely to be fixable.​ Slow reverse tends to skip frames when viewing HiDef content and some low bandwidth StdDef content. This may be due to hardware limitations

Trm

Trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources


TSTools

A set of tools for manipulating TS files, they include :-

Tstools.jpg






TTYSnoop

TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.


Tunefix

Tunefix.png

Tunefix restores a user's settings after a retune has been run, the 5 Keywords are :-

  • REGION to be used (channels from other regions will be removed)
  • LCN (s) by number and/or range will be removed
  • NAME services by name will be removed
  • MUX (s) (all channels from these MUXs will be removed)
  • FORCE named services to the correct LCN

Note Multiple Regions, LCNs, MUXs are separated by commas

Tunefix Update

Automatic channel deletion and fixing after a retune.


TV Diary

tvdiary is an add-on to the web interface. It tracks the TV programs you record and watch, and presents a diary view through the web interface, See Full Guide HERE


Uinput

User-space input kernel module


Unencrypt

New Note:- This package is no longer supported, with the addition to the Web-If of auto-decrypt and recursive auto-decrypt these new functions are recommended in place of Unencrypt due to them being more robust and having more sanity checks

The function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are decrypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results

To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via Telnet enter one of the lines below :-

unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" HIDE process a single directory

unencryptsetup HIDE process all files in 'My Video'

unencryptsetup disable HIDE Turn off unencrypt

This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.

NOTES:-

  • Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer
  • It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
  • Auto-Unprotect must be running
  • Content sharing must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings

See Decryption flow chart HERE

Undelete

Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am. It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)

Settings can be changed in :- Web-If >> Settings >> Undelete Settings, e.g. :-

  • Dustbin Name
  • Remove files from dustbin after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 days
  • Reduce retention time to 0 days if disk space < 10GiB (configurable)

A Log records delete activity at /mod/tmp/empty_dustbin.log

Setting are contained in /mod/webif/plugin/undelete/user.conf

Version

Command line (Via Telnet) utility to display various Web-If version numbers, e.g. :-

humax# version

Humax HDR Fox T2 (humax)
  Humax Version: 1.03.12 (kernel HDR_CFW_3.00)
  Custom firmware version: 3.00 (build 2137)
  Web interface version: 1.2.1
  Serial Number: 12 3456789 12345

humax#


Vfdtest

Front-icons2.png

This utility turns on all segments of the Humax front display (Vacuum Fluorescent Display)

Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Run Diagnostic >> vfdtest (available in pull down menu). This will force the display to set all segments to 'on' for 30 seconds, followed by all segments off

NOTE:- normal display will return after the Humax is placed in standby

Command Line Version :-

vfdtest on HIDE Set Display to All segments On

vfdtest off HIDE Set Display to All Segments off


Vi

Text Editor, See Text Editors. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom Busybox package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).


Vim Basic

Text Editor, See Text Editors


Vim Standard

Text Editor, See Text Editors


Virtual-Disk

One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared. Any copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place

Note:- For new installations, Virtual-Disk2 is now recommended in place of this package


Virtual-Disk2

The original Virtual-Disk package (See Above) required a physical USB drive to be in place before the virtual drive could be seen, this new version removes this requirement by creating a drive called 'Virtual-USB', as with a 'real' USB drive, you will get an on-screen display each time the system is started, giving USB options


Web IF

Screen Shots HIDE Release Notes

An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser

Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-

Backup/Restore Schedule

Backup.png

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events

This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the backup folder e.g. /mod/var/backup/auto-2013-Feb-22-18:06.rbk

NOTE : An auto-schedule-restore backup, is a seperate file held in /mod/boot/schedule.ab

Change Channel

Web-If >> EPG >> Grid Style or Now and Next >> Click on a Channel Logo icon

A Change Channel? question box will pop-up, if you click on 'Yes' the Humax will change the 'Live' tuned channel to the selected channel

Note :- This option requires that the ir Custom Firmware package is installed

Change Folder

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Series Recording) >> Change Folder

Allows the name of a Series Recording folder to be changed, not valid on a single recording

Cleanup Old Recording (Schedules)

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Cleanup Old Recordings (at the bottom of the screen)

Allows all entries in the schedule that have no Start Time to be deleted, Humax normally auto-deletes these entries after 12 Weeks.

Note:- As the EPG is only 7/8 days long caution should be used when deleting scheduled entries that are transmitted less frequently e.g. fortnightly

Clipboard

Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard

Create Folder

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> More >> Create Folder

Create a new folder destination for future recordings, See also Change Folder where you can change the default folder name

Copy

See Clipboard

Crop

Crop.png

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop

See Edit on Box link HERE

Cut

See Clipboard

Delete

Remove file, folder, item from a recording schedule etc., depending on where the option is encountered

Decrypt

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt

This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTES:-

  • both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
  • Decrypt requires Content sharing to be turned on

De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

Webif-media-ded.png
Webif-media-ded2.png

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also separate duplicates into a new folder

See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles

It will Also separate duplicates into a new folder

See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>

Detect Adverts

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Detect Adverts

Add bookmarks to a recording where adverts are detected, so that they can be cropped

Disable AR

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Recording) >> Disable AR

Allows the default Accurate Recording feature to be replaced with Padding on a 'per-recording' basis, in a further drop down menu start and stop padding times can be entered

Download

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download

This function will download with decryption an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-

  1. The File type *.TS must not be associated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
  2. Your browser must allow re-direction of addresses

Enable Auto-Audio

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Audio

Automatically extract an MP3 audio file from all recordings placed in this folder

Enable Auto-Dedup

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup

Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also Dedup)

Enable Auto-Decrypt

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also Decrypt)

Enable Auto Expire

Autoexp.png

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Expire

Automatically delete files in a selected folder a pre-set number of days after recording e.g.1 to 999 days or when above a total number of recordings, Note :- If the Undelete package is installed, the files will be placed in the [Deleted folder] first


Bookmarks

Bookmarks.png

Add, remove and edit bookmarks manually

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Bookmarks

Enable Auto-MPG

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-MPG

Automatically extract MPG copys of the *.TS files in the same folder, the MPG versions strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

  • The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
  • ffmpeg package must be installed
  • Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files

Enable Auto-Shrink

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also Shrink)

Enable Recursive Auto-Shrink

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

Enable Recursive Auto-Decrypt

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

Enable Recursive Auto-Dedup (command line)

NOTE :- This is not available from the Web-If as it may not be a good idea. Not all series are amenable to auto-dedup and if the broadcaster uses the same programme title for each episode then all but one will be flagged as duplicates.

However, if you wish, you can enable this option from the command line by creating an .autodedupr file, e.g.

touch "/mod/My Video/Kids/.autodedupr"

Extract Audio

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio

This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard Def. Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-

  • The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
  • ffmpeg package must be installed
  • Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
  • The extracted MP3 file is in a format sometimes called MPEG-2 Audio, not the more common Layer 3 audio, although some MP3 players will accept this format, a greater number of MP3 players require the layer 3 format, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out on the Humax due to amount of CPU usage required

Extract To MPG

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG

This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

  • The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
  • ffmpeg package must be installed
  • Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
  • The equivalent command line would be:-
ffmpeg -y -benchmark -v 0 -i <ts file> -map 0:0 -map 0:1 -vcodec copy -acodec copy <mpg file>

Enable Auto-mpg

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Folder) >> OPT+ >> Enable Auto-mpg

As above but working on every file in a selected folder

File Editor

Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to desired file]

Lock

Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion

Mark as Watched

Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol

Manual Event

Manual-event.png

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Manual Event

Allows the set up of a manual recording or reminder, options include:-

  • Create : One-off, Daily, weekly,Weekday, Weekend
  • Create : Recording or Reminder
  • From : Date/Time to: Date/Time
  • Channel : Number / Name
  • Event Title : Defaults to Channel Name

Multi Mode Recording

This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Accurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See Guide Here

Network Settings

Network-settings.png

Web-If MAIN >> Settings >> Network Settings

This option provides a Web-If alternative to entering Ethernet Interface and Wireless Interface parameters into the standard Humax Settings screen. The Web-If Wireless Interface screen has several advantages over the standard Humax one e.g :-

  • Allows a wider range of ascii characters e.g. "%#<>" to be entered for passwordphrases
  • Overcomes time restrictions when entering long passphrases / Keys

Notes

  • Web-If 1.2.0-3 or later must be running
  • To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected, run /sbin/wifi-up from CLI
  • To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected and Wireless Helper is installed run /mod/sbin/wifi-up from CLI to shutdown the Ethernet interface when bringing up the wireless interface

New Folder

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> New Folder

Creates a new empty folder, into which recorded files can be moved

Paste

See Clipboard

Webif-media-detail.png

Play

This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plug-in installed for your browser

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Click on Single File) >> Play

Rename (File)

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Click on Single File) >> Rename

Enables the following fields to be changed / added to a single file :-

  • New Filename
  • New Medialist Title
  • New Synopsis
  • New Guidance Text
  • New Genre

Rename (Folder)

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Rename

Enables a folder to be re-named

Reset New Flag

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Reset New Flag

Mark a Folder as containing new material

Save Last Streamed Content

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Save Last Streamed Content

This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-

cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4"

NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed

Set Thumbnail

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Set Thumbnail

Change the current on-screen Thumbnail picture for one of 5 pictures covering a 2.5 Second time frame, the centre frame time can be offset from 0 - 99999 seconds, there is also a -30, -5, +5 and +30 second 'nudge' that can be added to the offset.

Notes

  • The Set Thumbnail option will be greyed out if the file is not decrypted first
  • High Definition files have 3 pictures covering a 1.5 Second time frame
  • Thumbnails may take some time to generate on Hi-Def Files
  • If a bookmark is present the thumbnail selections will centre on it

Sidecar Files

see Sidecar

Split

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)

This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.

The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial

Shrink (stripts)

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink

Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

Sweeper Rules

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Sweeper Rules

View / Edit the Sweeper Rules for this folder. Note this option will only be displayed if the sweeper package is installer

Toggle no-sweep flag

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Toggle no-sweep flag

Disable / enable the sweeper rule generated for this folder

View Thumbnail

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> View Thumbnail

View current on-screen Thumbnail picture


Web-IF Channel Icons

A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels


Webif-Charts

Chart modules for the web interface


Webif-iphone

A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices

See Screenshots HERE


Webif Style Sheet

The web interface allow you to set your own style overrides in a style sheet file called EXTRA.css, it is located at /mod/webif/html/css/EXTRA.css and is selectable from the Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor drop down menu. Lines added to this file can change some aspects of how the Web Interface is presented to the user e.g. the following lines will prevent genre, guidance (all occurrences) or channel icons being displayed :-

img.genre { display: none; }
img[src^="/img/Guidance"] { display: none; }
img.browsechannel { display: none; }


Change the size of the pie chart:-

#tbdiskpie
{
  width: 100px;
  height: 100px;
}

.tbdiskpie
{
  top: 7px !important;
}

Add Borders to Web-If Pages :-

table.schedule { border-spacing: 2px; }
table.schedule tr > * { border: 1px solid; }

Change font colour or size :-

table.schedule td * { color: black; }
table.schedule td { font-size: 1.1em; }

Change Icon size

img.button { height: 50px; }

Remove EPG 'Go to Top' arrow :-

#toTop, #toTopHover
{
  background: transparent !important;
  display: none !important;
  opacity: 100 !important;
}

Remove EPG ENC icons

img.epgenc { display: none; }

Webshell

After installing this package, an extra icon will be added to the Main Menu >> Diagnostics page at the bottom right, after a re-boot, this will allow access to a Humax Command line similar to using Telnet access


webm

This is an audiovisual media file format, if you download files in this format from YouTube (See Youtube-dl), the video and audio may be separated into two files, It is possible to merge these files using ffmpeg, if you download the *.webm video only file and rename it in_vid.webm and download the *.m4a file and rename it in_aud.m4a then the following ffmpeg command line will merge them for you :-

ffmpeg -i in_aud.m4a -i in_vid.webm -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi


wget

Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP

Notes:-

  • There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version
  • Both the Busybox and the current stand alone versions of wget (1.12) may fail on websites that demand newer versions of TLS/SSL than the ones supported

When attempting to download a Custom Firmware package specifying a version number, an error will be produced unless the -U option is used, eg :-

wget -U "" http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/at_3.1.18_mipsel.opk

The use of "opkg download" with a specifed version number will also fail


Wireless Helper

Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle


WOL

Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.

ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 

To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-

echo  /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol

NOTES:-

  • WOL is also built into Network_Shares_Automount
  • The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by


Xtra1 Portal

See Guide HERE


Youtube-dl

This pacakage uses a command line to download videos from Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV Hub etc., in the following example, a 4K test video is downloaded from YouTube :-

Humax2# youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

The above downloads a 720 line version of the file which is pretty useless when testing 2176 lines, however it is possible to list all available video formats using the -F option :-

Humax2# youtube -F https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[info] Available formats for SlLFOrWvY_M:
format code  extension  resolution note
249          webm       audio only DASH audio    3k , opus @ 50k, 26.87KiB
250          webm       audio only DASH audio    3k , opus @ 70k, 26.87KiB
251          webm       audio only DASH audio    3k , opus @160k, 26.87KiB
171          webm       audio only DASH audio    6k , vorbis@128k, 22.21KiB
140          m4a        audio only DASH audio  145k , m4a_dash container, mp4a.40.2@128k, 932.03KiB
278          webm       256x144    144p   34k , webm container, vp9, 13fps, video only, 184.31KiB
242          webm       426x240    240p   44k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 248.03KiB
160          mp4        256x144    144p   50k , avc1.42c00c, 13fps, video only, 257.52KiB
134          mp4        640x360    360p   74k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 417.64KiB
243          webm       640x360    360p   78k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 433.50KiB
133          mp4        426x240    240p   87k , avc1.4d4015, 25fps, video only, 480.96KiB
244          webm       854x480    480p  116k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 633.67KiB
135          mp4        854x480    480p  117k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 656.08KiB
136          mp4        1280x720   720p  191k , avc1.4d401f, 25fps, video only, 1.04MiB
247          webm       1280x720   720p  203k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.08MiB
137          mp4        1920x1080  1080p  312k , avc1.640028, 25fps, video only, 1.71MiB
248          webm       1920x1080  1080p  357k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.89MiB
271          webm       2560x1440  1440p  609k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 3.20MiB
313          webm       3840x2160  2160p 1122k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 5.88MiB
17           3gp        176x144    small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2@ 24k, 272.97KiB
36           3gp        320x180    small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2, 1004.79KiB
43           webm       640x360    medium , vp8.0, vorbis@128k, 589.88KiB
18           mp4        640x360    medium , avc1.42001E, mp4a.40.2@ 96k, 1.61MiB
22           mp4        1280x720   hd720 , avc1.64001F, mp4a.40.2@192k (best)

you can then select the required version of the video with the -f option

Humax2# youtube -f "313" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12

NOTE:- the required download file is named *.webm this file won't be visible from the remote control OPT+ copy/move lisings, but is visible via Telnet / FTP etc., you can rename the file to something like 4K-test.mp4 before viewing directly on your 4K TV (not via the HD only Humax)

To combine video only and audio only files into a single file use the following option (Video MUST be the first item, e.g. 313)

Humax2# youtube -f "313+171"  https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm
[download] 100% of 22.21KiB in 00:00
[ffmpeg] Merging formats into "/mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm"
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm (pass -k to keep)
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm (pass -k to keep)

Youtube-dl has a config file at :- /mod/etc/youtube-dl.conf

Full reference notes are here :-

Github Notes

A list of websites claimed to be working for the Windows version of Youtube-DL is here :-

Available Sites

Mainsteam sites Working on the Humax Version

Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV-Hub, STV, dplay

Mainstream sites Not Working on the Humax Version

Channel4, My5, UKTVPlay

Zeroconf

mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS

After installation the zeroconf package will participate in mDNS-like traffic so you can access the box by name from most operating systems. On some, like Apple and Linux, you would access it as humax.local (assuming humax is the hostname) and on others, like Windows, you can just use humax. Windows can also pick up the name to IP address mapping if you have Samba installed and running.


Zip

zip utilities for compressing files :-

Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03

humax# zip
Copyright (c) 1990-2008 Info-ZIP - Type 'zip "-L"' for software license.
Zip 3.0 (July 5th 2008). Usage:
zip [-options] [-b path] [-t mmddyyyy] [-n suffixes] [zipfile list] [-xi list]
  The default action is to add or replace zipfile entries from list, which
  can include the special name - to compress standard input.
  If zipfile and list are omitted, zip compresses stdin to stdout.
  -f   freshen: only changed files  -u   update: only changed or new files
  -d   delete entries in zipfile    -m   move into zipfile (delete OS files)
  -r   recurse into directories     -j   junk (don't record) directory names
  -0   store only                   -l   convert LF to CR LF (-ll CR LF to LF)
  -1   compress faster              -9   compress better
  -q   quiet operation              -v   verbose operation/print version info
  -c   add one-line comments        -z   add zipfile comment
  -@   read names from stdin        -o   make zipfile as old as latest entry
  -x   exclude the following names  -i   include only the following names
  -F   fix zipfile (-FF try harder) -D   do not add directory entries
  -A   adjust self-extracting exe   -J   junk zipfile prefix (unzipsfx)
  -T   test zipfile integrity       -X   eXclude eXtra file attributes
  -y   store symbolic links as the link instead of the referenced file
  -e   encrypt                      -n   don't compress these suffixes